Toyota 2011 Corolla Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2011-Corolla-Owners-Manual-763070 toyota-2011-corolla-owners-manual-763070 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 524 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

516
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
M + S Mud and Snow
MAX Maximum
MIN Minimum
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC Traction Control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 20
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk
Smart key system................. 23
Wireless remote control ....... 34
Doors.................................... 39
Trunk .................................... 45
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 49
Rear seats............................ 52
Head restraints..................... 54
Seat belts ............................. 56
Steering wheel ..................... 64
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.................................. 65
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 67
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows
Power windows .................... 69
Moon roof ............................. 71
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .... 75
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ................................ 79
Theft prevention labels
(for U.S.A.) ......................... 82
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 83
SRS airbags ......................... 85
Front passenger occupant
classification system........... 97
Child restraint systems ....... 102
Installing child restraints ..... 106
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 118
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart key
system)............................. 129
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system) ...................... 133
Automatic transmission ...... 137
Manual transmission........... 143
Turn signal lever ................. 144
Parking brake ..................... 145
Horn.................................... 146
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 147
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 150
Multi-information display..... 154
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.................. 157
Fog light switch ................... 159
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 160
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control...................... 162
Driving assist systems ........ 166
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage ............. 170
Vehicle load limits ............... 173
Winter driving tips ............... 174
Trailer towing
(2.4 L 4-cylinder
[2AZ-FE] engine) .............. 178
Trailer towing
(1.8 L 4-cylinder
[2ZR-FE] engine) .............. 186
Dinghy towing (automatic
transmission) .................... 187
Dinghy towing (manual
transmission) .................... 188
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................. 192
Manual air conditioning
system .............................. 198
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers ............... 205
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ............ 206
Using the radio ................... 210
Using the CD player ........... 217
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ....................... 225
Operating an iPod .............. 233
Operating a USB
memory ............................ 240
Optimal use of the audio
system.............................. 248
Using the AUX port............. 253
Using the steering wheel
audio switches.................. 255
3-3. Using the Bluetooth®
audio system
Bluetooth® audio system.... 259
Using the Bluetooth®
audio system .................... 262
Operating a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.... 267
Setting up a Bluetooth®
enabled portable player.... 269
Bluetooth® audio system
setup ................................ 274
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-4. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
features ............................ 275
Using the hands-free
phone system................... 279
Making a phone call ........... 289
Setting a cellular phone...... 293
Security and system
setup ................................ 298
Using the phone book ........ 302
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 309
• Interior light ...................... 311
• Personal lights ................. 311
• Personal/interior lights...... 312
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 313
• Glove box......................... 314
• Console box ..................... 314
• Cup holders...................... 316
• Auxiliary boxes ................. 318
• Bottle holders ................... 320
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors .......................... 321
Vanity mirrors ..................... 322
Clock .................................. 323
Ashtray ............................... 324
Cigarette lighter.................. 325
Power outlet ....................... 326
Seat heaters....................... 327
Floor mat ............................ 329
Compass ............................ 330
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 336
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 338
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 341
General maintenance ......... 343
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs .......................... 346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions....................... 347
Hood ................................... 351
Positioning a floor jack........ 353
Engine compartment .......... 356
Tires.................................... 370
Tire inflation pressure ......... 378
Wheels................................ 382
Air conditioning filter ........... 384
Key battery ......................... 386
Checking and replacing
fuses................................. 390
Light bulbs .......................... 400
4Maintenance and care
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ............ 414
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................... 415
If you think something is
wrong ................................ 420
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................. 421
Event data recorder ............ 422
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... .......................... 424
If you have a flat tire............ 436
If the engine will not start .... 448
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.................... 450
If you lose your keys ........... 451
If the electronic key does
not operate properly.......... 452
If the battery is
discharged ........................ 454
If your vehicle overheats ..... 460
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 463
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency ........................ 465
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 468
Fuel information.................. 480
Tire information .................. 483
6-2. Customization
Customizable features........ 495
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 499
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 502
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 503
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 506
Abbreviation list........................ 516
Alphabetical index .................... 517
What to do if... .......................... 525
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
15
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these
parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible
for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may
cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
16
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may
affect electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequen-
tial multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake
system, SRS airbag system or seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instruc-
tions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
17
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
18
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if
the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or
its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must
or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota
and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through means “Do not”, “Do not
do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior fea-
tures
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
6
Headlights (low beam)
P. 157
Pictorial index Exterior
Front fog lights ∗
P. 159
Front turn signal and parking
lights
P. 144, 157
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 67
Front side marker lights
P. 157
Headlights (high beam) and daytime
running lights
Moon roof ∗
P. 71
Hood
P. 351
Windshield wipers
P. 160
7
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 370
P. 436
P. 478
P. 483
Trunk
P. 45
Rear turn signal lights
P. 144
Stop/tail and rear side marker lights
P. 157
∗: If equipped
Doors
P. 39
Fuel filler door
P. 75
8
Glove box
P. 314
Power window
switches ∗
P. 69
SRS front
passenger
airbag
P. 85
SRS driver airbag
P. 85
Interior
Pictorial index
Floor mat
P. 329
Head restraints
P. 54
Seat belts
P. 56
Auxiliary boxes
P. 318
Parking brake lever
P. 145
Shift lever
P. 137, 143
Front seats
P. 49
Cup holders
P. 316
Cup holders
P. 316
SRS side airbags
P. 85
Console box
P. 314
9
Anti-glare inside
rear view mirror
P. 65
Interior light
P. 311
Personal lights ∗
Personal/interior lights ∗
P. 311
P. 312
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 85
A
∗: If equipped
Sun visors
P. 321
Vanity mirrors
P. 322
Auxiliary boxes ∗
P. 318
Window lock
switch ∗
P. 69
Power window
switches ∗
P. 69
B
Door lock switch ∗
P. 39
Inside door lock button
P. 40
Compass ∗
P. 330
Moon roof switch ∗
P. 71
10
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 147
P. 154
Tilt and telescopic
steering control lever
P. 64
Pictorial index
Trunk opener
P. 45
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch ∗
P. 157
P. 144
P. 159
Instrument panel
Audio system
P. 206
Windshield wiper and washer switch
P. 160
Hood lock release
lever
P. 351
Fuel filler door opener
P. 75
Emergency flasher switch
P. 414
Shift lock override
button ∗
P. 450
Cigarette lighter ∗
Power outlet ∗
Ashtray ∗
Auxiliary box ∗
P. 325
P. 326
P. 324
P. 318
Tire pressure warning
reset switch ∗
P. 371
Horn
P. 146
11
A
Air conditioning
system
P. 192
Air conditioning
system
P. 198
Automatic air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Engine immobilizer system
indicator
P. 79
Seat heater switches ∗
P. 327
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
switch ∗/rear window defogger switch ∗
P. 205
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
switch ∗/rear window defogger switch ∗
P. 205
Engine immobilizer system
indicator
P. 79
Clock
P. 323
Clock
P. 323
Seat heater switches ∗
P. 327
AUX port ∗
AUX port/USB port ∗
P. 253
P. 233, 240, 253
AUX port ∗
AUX port/USB port ∗
P. 253
P. 233, 240, 253
∗: If equipped
12
B
Outside rear view
mirror switches
P. 67
Auxiliary boxes
P. 318
Pictorial index Instrument panel
VSC/TRAC off switch
P. 166
13
C
Cruise control switch ∗
P. 162
Talk switch ∗
P. 280
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system) ∗
P. 133
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart
key system) ∗
P. 129
Audio remote control
switches ∗
P. 255
Telephone switch ∗
P. 280
∗: If equipped
Type A
14
C
Talk switch ∗
P. 280
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Type B
∗: If equipped
Telephone switch ∗
P. 280
Cruise control switch ∗
P. 162
Engine (ignition) switch
P. 133
Audio remote control
switches
P. 255
QUICK REFERENCE
GUIDE
COROLLA
2011
414868M1.indd 1414868M1.indd 1 11/17/10 6:51 PM11/17/10 6:51 PM
2011
Corolla
!A word about safe vehicle operations
This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle
operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental
operations so you can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for
the Owner’s Manual located in your vehicle’s glove box. We
strongly encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual and
supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding
of your vehicle’s capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your
new Corolla.
This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of Corolla
operations. Every Corolla owner should review the Owner’s
Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in
color throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box contains safe
operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.
All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at
the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make
changes at any time without notice.
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page B
1
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Engine maintenance 7
Fuel tank door release and cap 6
Hood release 7
Indicator symbols 5
Instrument cluster 4
Instrument panel 2-3
Keyless entry16
Air Conditioning/Heating 14
Audio 12-13
Auto lock/unlock29
Automatic Transmission 8
Auxiliary storage 18
Clock 16
Cruise control 15
Cup holders 18
Door locks-Power 17
Light control-Instrument panel 18
Lights & turn signals 11
Moonroof 17
Multi-information display 15
Parking brake 8
Power outlet 11
Seat adjustments-Front 9
Seat adjustments-Rear 9
Seats-Head restraints 10
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)16
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 17
Windows-Power 10
Windshield wipers & washers 10
Child comfort guide 19
Doors-Child safety locks 20
Seat belts 19
Seat belts-Shoulder belt adjustment 19
Spare tire & tools 21
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System 20
Trunk-Internal release 20
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND
EMERGENCY FEATURES
1Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature.
2 Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for instructions and
more information.
INDEX
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 1
2
OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Steering wheel audio controls*
Voice command button*
Telephone controls*
Ignition switch
Cruise control*
VSC/TRAC OFF switch
Power outside rearview mirror controls
Auxiliary storage
Headlight, turn signal and front fog light* controls
Wiper and washer controls
Emergency flasher button
Audio system
Air Conditioning controls
Outside rearview mirror*/Rear window defogger button
Steering wheel controls
Type A
Type B
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 2
3
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Front passenger seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
Engine immobilizer indicator
Clock
USB*/AUX port
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System reset
Tilt and telescopic steering control
Hood lock release lever
* If equipped
Automatic Air Conditioning system
Manual Air Conditioning system
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 3
4
OVERVIEW
Instrument cluster
Service indicator and reminder
Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Trip meter reset/Instrument panel light control
Odometer and two trip meters
Automatic Transmission shift range display (if equipped)
Multi-information display
Display button
Engine coolant temperature
Type A
Type B
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 4
5
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Indicator symbols
Charging system warning1
Brake system warning1
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
Anti-lock Brake System warning1
Headlight high beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
Slip indicator1
Cruise control/Cruise control SET indicator
Low Tire Pressure Warning1
Open door warning
SRS Airbag warning1
Driver seat belt reminder (on the instrument cluster)
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Front passenger seat belt reminder (on the center panel)
(alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph)
Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
Low fuel level warning
Fog light indicator
For details, refer to “Indicators and warning lights,” Section 2-2, 2011
Owner’s Manual.
Low engine oil pressure warning1
Vehicle Stability Control OFF indicator1
Maintenance/Service required indicator1
Electric power steering warning1
1If indicator does not turn off within a few seconds of starting engine, there may
be a malfunction. Have vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Traction Control OFF indicator1
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 5
6
OVERVIEW
Keyless entry (if equipped)
Push
Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors
Locking operation Unlocking operation
Panic button
Push and hold
NOTE: If a door is not opened within
60 seconds of unlocking, all doors
will relock for safety.
Trunk lid operation
Push and hold
Fuel tank door release and cap
NOTE: Tighten until one click is
heard. If the cap is not tightened
enough, Check Engine “ ”
indicator may illuminate.
Pull
Turn to open
Store
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 6
7
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Hood release
Pull up latch
and raise hood
Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil level dipstick
Windshield washer fluid tank
NOTE: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will
help extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance.
Please refer to the “Warranty Maintenance Guide.”
Engine maintenance
Pull
4 cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
4
cylinder
(2ZR-FE) engine
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 7
8
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Automatic Transmission (if equipped)
* The ignition switch must be “ON” and the brake pedal depressed to shift
from Park.
Shift the shift lever to “S” position from “D” position.
+: Upshift (push and release)
-: Downshift (pull and release)
Downshifting increases power going uphill, or provides engine braking
downhill. For best fuel economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.
“S” (Sequential) mode
Standard type Multi-mode type
Park*
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
“S” mode
Park*
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
Third gear
Second gear
First gear
3
2
L
“S” “D”
Parking brake
(2) Push
Set Release
(1) Pull slightly
(3) Lower
Pull
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 8
9
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Auto lock/unlock (if equipped)
Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate in two different
modes, or turned OFF.
-Doors lock when shifting from Park.
-Doors lock when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph or higher.
-Doors unlock when shifting into Park.
-Doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened within 10 seconds after
turning the ignition switch OFF.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
Seat adjustments-Rear
Seat adjustments-Front
Seat position (forward/backward)
Height crank (driver side only)
Seatback angle
Fold down
Pull
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 9
10
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Seats-Head restraints
Front Rear
Lock release button Lock release button
Windshield wipers & washers
Interval wipe
Single wipe
Slow
Fast
Pull to wash and wipe
Windows-Power (if equipped)
Up
Down
Driver side
Window lock switch
Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the switch completely down
and release to fully open. To stop window midway, lightly push the switch
in the opposite direction.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver’s window
remains operable.
Intermittent windshield wiper
frequency adjustment
(if equipped)
Increase
Decrease
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 10
11
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Lights & turn signals
Turn signals
Headlights
High beam flasher
Low beam
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Headlights turn on automatically
upon starting engine. The brightness of the headlights will automatically
change depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Right turn
Lane change
Lane change
Left turn
High beam
Headlights
Parking lights
Turn
Power outlet
Designed for 12V car accessories.
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 11
12
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Audio
Eject CD
Push to turn
ON/OFF
Seek station/
CD track select
Station/CD
track scan
Mode
Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number
View CD text
Push to skip
up/down
folder and
radio category
type
Push and turn
to adjust tone
& balance
Type 2
Type 1
Push to turn
ON/OFF
Push and
turn to
adjust tone
& balance
Seek station/
CD track select
Station/CD
track select
Mode
Eject CD Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above button
View CD text
Mute
Menu
Setting preset
buttons
Load CD(s)
Type 3 additional functions
Push to skip
up/down
folder and
radio category
type
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 12
13
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Radio
To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset
button (from to or one of ) until you hear a beep. Push
desired preset button (from to or one of ) to select.
To scan stations Push and hold “SCAN” to scan preset stations. Push again
to hold selection.
“”
Use to search within the selected audio medium (radio, CD, iPod®, etc.).
“MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and to select an audio mode. Push and hold to
turn the audio system OFF.
v
v
AUX port/USB port
Steering wheel switches (if equipped)
Volume control
CD Player
To scan tracks on a disc Push “SCAN.” Push again to hold selection.
CD changer (Type 3 only)
-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.
-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until you hear a beep.
Insert one disc. Shutter will close and then re-open for next disc.
To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE” or “TUNE.SCROLL.”
AUX port USB/AUX port
Type A
Volume control
AUX port
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX port, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s speaker system while in AUX
mode.
USB port (if equipped)
By connecting a USB-compatible portable audio device or USB memory to
the USB port, you can listen to music from the portable audio device or
USB memory through the vehicle’s speaker system while in USB mode.
Type B
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 13
14
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Air Conditioning/Heating
Airflow vent
Use “ ” or “ ” mode to reduce window fogging (system
automatically switches to fresh air mode).
Fan speed
Temperature selector
For quick cooling, turn to MAX A/C position and select
recirculated air mode (“ ” indicator ON).
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Outside rearview mirror*/Rear window defogger
Recirculate cabin air (fresh air when OFF)
* If equipped
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 14
15
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Cruise control (if equipped)
1 The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal.
2 The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.
Turning system ON/OFF
Functions
System ON/OFF
Increase speed
Set/Decrease speed
Cancel1
Resume2
Multi-information display
Push the display button to scroll through the following:
(1) Outside temperature
(2) Current gas mileage
(3) Average gas mileage*
(4) Miles left on remaining fuel
(5) Average vehicle speed from engine start*
(6) Running time from engine start*
* Push and hold display button to reset.
Display button
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 15
16
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Bluetooth®technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking
hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the compatible
telephone and the system.
Refer to “Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone),” Section 3-4 in
the Owner’s Manual, or go to Toyota.LetsTalk.com for more information
about phone connections and compatibility.
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
(if equipped)
Vehicles without moonroof
Vehicles with moonroof
Steering wheel telephone switches
Start call
End call
Voice command button
Volume control
Clock
Start call
End call
Voice command button
Volume control
Type B
Type A
Adjusts the hour
Adjusts the minutes
Microphone
Microphone
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 16
17
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Lock release lever
Angle
Length
Hold wheel, push lever down,
set angle and length, and
return lever.
Door locks-Power (if equipped)
Lock
Unlock
Moonroof (if equipped)
Sliding operation Tilting operation
Open
Tilt
Close Close
Recommended open position to
minimize wind noise.
Push once to open partway; again to
open completely.
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 17
18
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Cup holders
Front
Auxiliary storage
Instrument panel
Overhead console (if equipped)
Type A Type B (if equipped) Type C
Rear
Pull
Pull
Push
Pull
Light control-Instrument panel
Brightness
control -
+
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 18
19
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature
is used to help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child
restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Keep as low on
hips as possible
Take up slack
Too high
Seat belts
Push up, or
squeeze lock
release to lower
Seat belts-Shoulder belt adjustment
Rear seat outside
position guides
provide added
comfort for children
who have outgrown
child restraints.
Child comfort guide
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 19
20
System reset initialization
1. Push and hold “ SET” button
until the indicator blinks
three times.
2. Wait a few minutes to allow
initialization to complete.
Trunk-Internal release
Pull up
Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to be opened only from
the outside.
Rear door
Doors-Child safety locks
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning)
System
After adjusting tire pressures, or after tires have been rotated or
replaced, turn the ignition switch to “ON” and press and hold the
“ SET” button until indicator blinks three times. Let the vehicle sit for a
few minutes to allow initialization to complete.
Refer to the load label on the door jamb or the Owner’s Manual for tire
inflation specifications.
If the tire pressure indicator flashes for more than 60 seconds and then
remains on, take the vehicle to your local Toyota dealer.
NOTE: The warning light may come on due to temperature changes or
changes in tire pressure from natural air leakage. If the system has not
been initialized recently, setting the tire pressures to factory
specifications should turn off the light.
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 20
21
OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Spare tire & tools
Tool location
Removing the spare tire
(1) Remove the luggage floor cover.
(2) Remove the tool tray.
(3) Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and jack positioning
procedures.
Spare tire Jack
Tool box
(1) (2)
(3)
414868M2.qxd:414868M2 11/18/10 9:35 AM Page 21
CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE CENTER
1-800 -331-4331
00505-QRG11-COR
Printed in U.S.A. 11/10
10-TCS-04007
10%
Cert no. SGSNA-COC-005612
414868M1.indd 2414868M1.indd 2 11/17/10 6:54 PM11/17/10 6:54 PM
20
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (→P. 23)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(→P. 34)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Vehicles without smart key system (type A)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 34)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles without smart key system (type B)
Master keys (black)
Valet key (gray)
Key number plate
21
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (→P. 452)
■When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Set the trunk opener cancelling system. (→P. 46)
Vehicles with smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
Vehicles without smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using
the key number plate. (→P. 451)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
22
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
●Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-
tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
●Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-
rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
●Do not disassemble the electronic key.
23
1
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart key system∗
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 2 4 )
Unlocks the trunk (→P. 2 4 )
Starts the engine (→P. 129)
Electronic key
Electronic key Electronic key
∗: If equipped
24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the door is
locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
25
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
Antennas inside the cabin
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the outside front
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
the trunk release button.
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system and wireless remote control from
operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P. 452)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following
devices that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator on the key surface is off, press and
hold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while
pressing on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
■Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to pre-
vent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
●When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
●When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control func-
tion. (→P. 3 4 )
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (→P. 452)
STEP
1
STEP
2
Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver's door handle to unlock
only the driver's door. Exterior: Beeps three times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the front passenger's door han-
dle to unlock all doors.
Hold either front door handle to unlock
all doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used
because the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart key system
or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection
area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (→P. 386)
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
engine stops. (→P. 30)
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not func-
tion.)
■Note for the smart key system
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, package tray, floor, or in
the auxiliary box of the driver's side instrument panel or glove box
when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
are changed.
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically
be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to reduce the chance of vehicle theft and accidents resulting from erro-
neous operation.
●When any warning lights come on:
Take appropriate measures according to which warning light comes on.
(→P. 424)
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
●When an alarm sounds:
Take appropriate measures according to the following table.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
2 seconds
Tried to lock the doors
using the entry function
while the electronic key is
still inside the vehicle
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
vehicle and lock the
doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
the trunk and all doors are
locked
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
trunk and close the
trunk lid.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
60 seconds
Tried to exit the vehicle
while the shift lever is in P
with the electronic key and
lock the doors using the
entry function without first
turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the
doors again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
Tried to lock the vehicle
using the entry function
while a door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without
shifting the shift lever to P
Shift the shift lever to
P.
Interior alarm
beeps repeatedly
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver's door is open
(Opened the driver's door
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
while the driver's door is
open
Close the driver's
door.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■If the smart key system does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(→P. 452)
●Starting the engine: →P. 453
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 386
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
It is possible to deactivate the smart key system, etc.
(Customizable features →P. 495)
■Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
sounds once
The electronic key battery
is low
Replace the battery.
(→P. 386)
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 25)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control∗
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
∗: If equipped
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked:
Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
■Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 10 seconds if
an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer,
and lock the vehicle once more.
■Panic mode
Vehicles with smart key system
Vehicles without smart key system
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Key battery depletion
Vehicles with smart key system
→P. 2 9
Vehicles without smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 387)
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted (vehicles with smart
key system)
→P. 386
■Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles with smart key system
→P. 2 7
Vehicles without smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations.
●Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
●When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
●When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by, a
metallic object
●When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
●When the wireless key battery is depleted
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 495)
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key
system ⎯ type A)
FCC IDs: GQ4-29T
GQ4-36R
IC IDs: 1470A-10T
1470A-8R
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key
system ⎯ type B)
FCC ID: HYQ12BBY
FCC ID: HYQ13BBZ
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
39
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
■Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
→P. 2 3
■Wireless remote control (if equipped)
→P. 3 4
■Key
Vehicles with smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (→P. 452)
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
Vehicles with power door lock
system: Turning the key locks
and unlocks all doors. In the
driver’s door lock, turning the
key once unlocks the driver’s
door. Turning the key again
within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
■Door lock switch (if equipped)
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
■Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (vehicles with
power door lock system)
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
*1: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
*2: Vehicles with smart key system
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function*1
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking func-
tion*1
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door lock-
ing function
*2
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
Vehicles with smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between set and canceled, follow the procedure below:
Vehicles with smart key system: Close all the doors and
switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Vehicles without smart key system: Close all the doors and
switch the engine switch to the “ON” position. (Perform step 2
within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
STEP
1
STEP
2
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
*1: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
*2: Vehicles with smart key system
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
Function Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function*1
P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function*1
Speed linked door locking func-
tion
*2
N
Driver's door linked door unlock-
ing function
■When all the doors are locked with the wireless remote control, entry
function or key
The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.
The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the wire-
less remote control, entry function or key.
■The doors cannot be locked when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
Vehicles without smart key system
The key is in the engine switch and either of the front door is open.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 495)
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock the doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seat.
45
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the entry function, wireless remote
control, key or trunk opener.
■Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Release the trunk lid.
■Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
→P. 2 3
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
→P. 3 4
Key (vehicles with smart key system)
The trunk can be opened using the mechanical key. (→P. 452)
Key (vehicles without smart key system)
Turn the master key clockwise
to release the trunk lid.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk opener cancelling system
To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, do the following
procedure.
Turn the master key (vehicles
without smart key system) or
mechanical key (vehicles with
smart key system) counterclock-
wise to lock the trunk opener fea-
ture.
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote
control or the entry function.
■Internal trunk release lever
■Which key to leave with a parking attendant after the trunk opener can-
celling system is set
→P. 2 1
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling
down on the glow-in-the-dark lever
located on the inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
●Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffo-
cate.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again
after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed
again after it is opened.
●The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the trunk lid
unexpectedly opening or closing by
itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
open and secure before using the
trunk.
●When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
●When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
49
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Power seat (driver's side only)
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly for-
ward to help reduce the risk of
whiplash on the seat occupant.
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion
to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
●Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
Inner
structure
During
rear-end
collision
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
■Before folding down the rear seat
Stow the rear outside seat belt
buckles and move the rear
center seat belt buckle as
shown.
■Folding down rear seatbacks
Pull the seatback lever in the
trunk for the seatback you
wish to fold down.
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
■When a rear seatback is folded down
●Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the
webbing of the rear center seat belt.
●Do not hold the seat by the seat belt comfort guide to prevent damage to
the rear seat.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
■Removing the head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Rear seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Lock release buttons
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Installing the head restraints
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
●Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle
until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a person's neck, use the seat belt
comfort guide.
Pull out the comfort guide from
the pocket.
Slide the belt past the slot of the
guide.
The elastic cord must be behind
the seat belt.
■Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.
STEP
1
STEP
2
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Buckle, position and release the
seat belt.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
STEP
3
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (→P. 106)
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 56)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 102)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 56 regarding seat belt usage.
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
■Seat belt extender
■Rear outside seat belt
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
Use the seat belt after passing it through
the guide if the seat belt comes free from
the guide.
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-
ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 57)
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using
the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount
of protection in an accident and could lead to serious injures in a collision
or sudden stop.
●Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in
the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt comfort guide
●Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must
be behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.
●To reduce the chance of injury in case of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident while driving, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket
when it is not in use.
●Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not fall
off the shoulder.
Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
press the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
65
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem: The mirror will revert to
the automatic mode each time
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key
system: The mirror will revert
to the automatic mode each
time the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
67
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding back the mirrors
Push backward to fold the mir-
rors.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 205)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be properly adjusted
before driving.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
69
1
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Power windows∗
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)*
*: Pressing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
∗: If equipped
70
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
■The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■Operating the power windows after turning the engine OFF
Vehicles with smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
to OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles without smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
71
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Before driving
Moon roof∗
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up
and down.
■Opening and closing
Open*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened posi-
tion.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close*
*: Push the switch in either direc-
tion to stop the moon roof part-
way.
■Tilt up and down
Tilt up*
Tilt down*
*: Push the switch in either direc-
tion to stop the moon roof part-
way.
∗: If equipped
72
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
■The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine OFF
Vehicles with smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles without smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing
or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■To reduce wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as
driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
73
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10
seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “TILT” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
Release the “TILT” switch once and then press and hold the “TILT”
switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” switch or press and hold the “TILT” switch. The moon roof will
tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open
and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
74
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
75
1
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that
all the doors and windows are closed.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and
windows are closed.
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the fuel filler door
opener.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
76
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank
cap, turn it until a clicking sound
is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
■Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■Fuel tank capacity
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
77
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static
electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel
vapors to ignite.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
78
1-5. Refueling
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
79
1
Before driving
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF
to indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
Vehicles without smart key
system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
80
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
U.S.A.)
Vehicles with smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
Vehicles without smart key system
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY
FCC ID: MOZRI-33BTY
FCC ID: WRKRI-34BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
Canada)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
81
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
82
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (for U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from sto-
len vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
83
1
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (→P. 4 9 )
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (→P. 49)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(→P. 64)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (→P. 54)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P. 56)
84
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
85
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag and front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components.
Side airbags and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats.
86
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sys-
tem controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front pas-
senger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position
sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front
passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Side and curtain shield air-
bag sensors
Front passenger airbag
Side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
“PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON” and “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Curtain shield airbag sen-
sors
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver’s seat position sen-
sor
87
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag
sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-
tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
88
1-7. Safety information
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof
side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be
hot.
●The windshield may crack.
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-
mately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or
deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the
bed of a truck, etc.).
●It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the
vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front air-
bags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag
may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even
if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 9 7 )
89
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags)
●The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the
event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb.
[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen-
dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h]). Depending on the conditions and type of accident, there
are times when the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) in a front
impact.
●The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag
on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if
the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 97)
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
90
1-7. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-
cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-
bags may occur.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if
the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a col-
lision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
91
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
●A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
92
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
93
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children. (→P. 102)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's air-
bag system will judge that the driver is
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the driver's airbag may not
activate correctly in a collision, resulting
in death or serious injury in the event of
collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
94
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not drive the vehicle while the driver
or passenger has items resting on their
knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
●Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board or steering wheel pad.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver and front passenger
airbags deploy.
95
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components (→P. 86).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as
the door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front and rear pillars, roof side
rail or assist grip.
●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
seriously injure or kill you, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rail.
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-
garoo bar etc.).
●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD
players.
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
97
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
SRS warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” indicator light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
98
1-7. Safety information
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG
OFF”
*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
ActivatedCurtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-
ture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights Not illuminated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
ActivatedCurtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
100
1-7. Safety information
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(→P. 102)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 106)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illumi-
nated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the
extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt
extender while the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger
side may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to
be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy
in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat,
return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehi-
cle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effec-
tiveness of the seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the
seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 106)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
102
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint system on a rear
seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 106)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Booster seat
104
1-7. Safety information
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 56)
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-
ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on
the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint sys-
tem that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen-
ger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger
seat. Adjust the seatback as uprights as possible and always move the
seat as far back as possible even if the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could
inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side air-
bags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
106
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (→P. 56)
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installation with LATCH system
Rear right seat only: Slide the
rear center seat belt to the side
to prevent it from getting pinched
in the lower anchorage.
Type A
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP
1
Canada only
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
108
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
Latch the buckles onto
the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
seat facing the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
110
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat
down into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap
and then allow it to retract
slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat
is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
■Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the
seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the booster
seat according to the manufac-
turer's instructions and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder, and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(→P. 56)
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
112
1-7. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
113
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or the lower
anchors, and do the following.
Outside
Remove the head restraint.
Center
Lock the head restraint in place
at the lowest position.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
114
1-7. Safety information
Outside only: Replace the head
restraint.
STEP
3
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR
lock mode: (→P. 59)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or dis-
comfort to the child.
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
●Only put a forward-facing or booster
child seat on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forward-
facing or booster child seat on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible even if the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated. Failing to do so may
result in death or serious injury if the
airbags deploy (inflate).
116
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
●Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is
secure.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
118
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing.
■Starting the engine
→P. 129, 133
■Driving
Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(→P. 137)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 145)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to
1. (→P. 143)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 145)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (→P. 137)
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to N. (→P. 143)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
119
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Parking the vehicle
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 145)
Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 137)
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF and stop the engine.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position and stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 145)
Shift the shift lever to N. (→P. 143)
When parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R. If necessary,
block the wheels.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
120
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting on a steep uphill
Automatic transmission
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended
to observe:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
121
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system (2.4 L 4-cylinder [2AZ-FE]
engine)
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 472)
122
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator
pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not let the vehicle roll back-
wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the
shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor
brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the
vehicle.
123
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can
cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious
health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
●Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an
automatic transmission) or R while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can
cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result in a
loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause insufficient engine braking and lead to an accident.
●Do not turn the engine off while driving. The power steering and brake
booster systems will not operate properly if the engine is not running.
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to
overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 139)
●When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing
an accident.
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of
vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious
injury.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bod-
ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
124
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-
shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles
with an automatic transmission) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●Vehicles with an automatic transmission: In order to prevent accidents due
to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while
the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
125
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission vehicles), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and
odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-
ard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance
increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle
to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the
pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance
becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
127
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator
pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
Manual transmission
●Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, tran-
saxle and gears.
●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
●Do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
●Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
●Do not shift into reverse when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may
damage the clutch, transaxle and gears.
Automatic transmission
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a
long time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (→P. 439)
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, and transaxle fluid etc.
●Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
129
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. If the
indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds,
whichever is less. If you press
and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch, the engine will
keep cranking for about 30
seconds maximum.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
130
2-1. Driving procedures
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode
changes each time the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF.
131
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Steering lock release
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 79)
■When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn
OFF.
■Key battery depletion
→P. 2 9
■When the electronic key battery is discharged
→P. 386
■Conditions affecting operation
→P. 2 7
■Note for the entry function
→P. 2 9
Make sure that the steering wheel lock is
released.
To release the steering wheel lock, gently
turn the wheel left or right while pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If the steering wheel lock does not
release, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator will flash green.
132
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven,
this could lead to an unexpected accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
133
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)
■Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the
engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds
maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the
engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds
maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
134
2-1. Driving procedures
■Turning the engine switch from “ACC” to “LOCK”
■Changing engine switch position
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the shift
lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
Shift the shift lever to P (auto-
matic transmission) or N (man-
ual transmission).
(→P. 137, 143)
Push in the key and turn to the
“LOCK” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
135
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Steering lock release
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 79)
■Key reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position.
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly in either
direction.
136
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the key in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods if the
engine is not running.
■When starting the engine
●2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine: Do not crank for more than 30 seconds
at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
137
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic transmission∗
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
Standard type
Vehicles with smart key system: While the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress
the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles without smart key system: While the engine switch
is in the “ON” position, depress the brake pedal and move
the shift lever.
∗: If equipped
138
2-1. Driving procedures
Multi-mode type
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
139
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Shift position uses
*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable
for driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom-
mended for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the
possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents
unnecessary upshifting.
Shift position Function
Standard type Multi-mode type
P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*1
SS mode driving*2
(→P. 140)
3Position for engine
braking
2Position for more
powerful engine braking
LPosition for maximum
engine braking
140
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode (multi-mode type)
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 5 or 4 accord-
ing to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if
AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the D position.
(→P. 142)
When the shift range is “4” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+”
sets the shift range to “5”.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Shift ranges and their functions
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a
higher shift range.
■Downshifting restrictions (standard type)
The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded.
mph (km/h)
■Downshift restriction warning buzzer (multi-mode type ⎯ S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)
Shift range Function
5A gear between 1 and 5 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4A gear between 1 and 4 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3A gear between 1 and 3 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2A gear between 1 and 2 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1 Setting the gear at 1.
Downshifting Maximum speed
3→2 59 (95)
2→L 28 (46)
142
2-1. Driving procedures
■When driving with the cruise control system (if equipped)
Standard type
Engine braking will not occur when downshifting from D to 3. (→P. 162)
Multi-mode type
Engine braking will not occur in S mode, even when downshifting to 4.
(→P. 162)
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 450
■If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever
to S (multi-mode type)
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the optimal gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
Standard type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
Multi-mode type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
143
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Manual transmission∗
■Maximum allowable speeds
Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maxi-
mum acceleration is necessary.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
mph (km/h)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
mph (km/h)
■Shifting the shift lever
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift
lever, and then release the
clutch pedal slowly.
Shift position Maximum speed
1 29 (48)
2 53 (85)
3 81 (130)
4 110 (178)
Shift position Maximum speed
1 33 (54)
2 56 (90)
3 81 (130)
∗: If equipped
144
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
145
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
■Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P. 174)
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
Sets the parking brake
Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the but-
ton.
U.S.A. Canada
146
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 64)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
147
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Type A
Type B
148
2-2. Instrument cluster
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Low fuel level warning light
→P. 426
Odometer/trip meter/instrument panel light control and trip meter
reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being
displayed.
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel light, turn the button.
(→P. 149)
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Multi-information display
→P. 154
Display button
Switches the multi-information display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
149
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 460)
150
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
■Instrument cluster
Type A
Type B
151
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Center panel
152
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 144)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(→P. 159)
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 157)
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 162)
Slip indicator
(→P. 166)
(if equipped)
Cruise control set indi-
cator (→P. 162)
Engine immobilizer sys-
tem indicator (→P. 79)
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 167)
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(→P. 167)
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
*1, 2
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON”
and
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
indicator
(→P. 97)
*1
*1
*1
Shift position
indicators
(→P. 137)
153
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS airbag warning light
not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems
are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in
death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (→P. 424)
*1: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
(
Canada
)(U.S.A.) (
Canada
)(U.S.A.) (
Canada
)
(U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) (if equipped) (if equipped) (Canada)
(on the
instrument
cluster)
(on the
center
panel)
(if equipped)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
154
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
Switch the display
Display items can be switched
by pressing the display button.
●Outside temperature
●Instantaneous fuel consumption
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data, including the outside temperature.
●Outside temperature dis-
play
Indicates the outside tempera-
ture.
●Trip information
Displays driving range, fuel
consumption and other cruis-
ing-related information.
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).
Displays the instantaneous of fuel consumption.
155
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
●Average fuel consumption
●Driving range
●Average vehicle speed
●Elapsed time
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
The function can be reset by pressing the display but-
ton for longer than one second when the average fuel
consumption is displayed.
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
engine was started or since the function was
reset.
The function can be reset by pressing the display but-
ton for longer than one second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
Displays the elapsed time since the engine was
started or since the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pressing the display but-
ton for longer than one second when the elapsed time
is displayed.
156
2-2. Instrument cluster
■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data will be reset.
●Average fuel consumption
●Driving range
●Average vehicle speed
●Elapsed time
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
NOTICE
■The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
157
2
When driving
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you to
turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime run-
ning lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and
all lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
158
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is
released.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
■Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned OFF and the driver's door
is opened with the key removed from the engine switch while the lights are
turned on.
Vehicles with smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF or
to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are
turned on.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
159
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Fog light switch∗
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such
as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are
on low beam.
Off
Front fog lights on
∗: If equipped
160
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation.
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not
be equipped depending on the
grade.
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
161
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
■The windshield wipers and washers can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control∗
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
■Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
STEP
1
STEP
2
∗: If equipped
163
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-
tinually until the lever is released.
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Cruise control can be set when
●Automatic transmission:
The shift lever is in the D or 3 range (standard type), or in the D or range
4 or higher of S has been selected (multi-mode type).
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission only) is
depressed.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
165
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
■If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
166
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
When VSC and TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or the front wheels spin, the
indicator flashes to indicate that
VSC/TRAC have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
167
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
button to turn off TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the button while
the vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
and VSC OFF indicator light
should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF after
turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
■Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when vehicle speed increases.
168
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Sounds and vibrations caused by ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after ABS is activated.
■If the slip indicator light comes on
There is a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC systems. Contact your Toyota
dealer and have your Toyota inspected.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating
when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from
excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The sys-
tem should return to normal within 10 minutes.
CAUTION
■ABS does not operate effectively when
●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
169
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Stopping distance when ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads
ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations.
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■When VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive
carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care
when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do
not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC system will not function correctly if different tires are fitted
on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
192
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system∗
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate.
Press “∧” to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the
temperature on .
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Fan speed display
Windshield defogger Temperature control
Air intake mode switch
Fan speed
Temperature setting display
OFF
Automatic mode
Changes the air outlets used
Air outlet display
Air conditioning
ON/OFF switch
STEP
1
STEP
2
∗: If equipped
193
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “∧” to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the tem-
perature on .
■Adjusting the fan speed
Press “∧” (increase) or “∨” (decrease) on .
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
■Changing the air outlets
Press .
The air outlets switch each time is pressed. The air flow
shown on the display indicates the following.
Air flows to the upper body.
194
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
Mainly air flows to the feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode.
: Some models
■Switching air intake modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
195
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system oper-
ates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return
to recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent.
196
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-
ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
●Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
■Using the recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situa-
tions where the windows need to be defogged.
■When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
■When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the temperature setting.
197
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
198
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system∗
Heater
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air intake mode switch
Temperature control dial
∗: If equipped
199
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting (heater)
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to increase the temper-
ature.
■Adjusting the temperature setting (air conditioning system)
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
Air conditioning system
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air intake mode switch Air conditioning ON/OFF switch
Temperature control dial
200
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Adjusting the fan speed
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counter-
clockwise (decrease).
Set the dial to “0” to turn the fan off.
■Selecting the air outlets
Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be
selected for more detailed adjustment.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
201
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Mainly air flows to the feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
: Some models
Air flows to the windshield and
side windows.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
■Switching air intake modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
202
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent.
203
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■For quick cooling (vehicles with air conditioning system)
Turn the temperature control dial to the “MAX A/C” position and select the
recirculated air mode.
■For quick clearing of the windshield and side windows (vehicles with
air conditioning system)
Press to turn the air conditioning on.
■Using the recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
■When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C) (vehicles with air
conditioning system)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
■When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature adjust-
ment dial.
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
204
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
205
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
■Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
■Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch
them to prevent from burning yourself.
Clear the rear window using the defogger.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
206
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Type A: CD player and AM/FM radio
Type B: CD player and AM/FM radio
207
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Type C: CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
Title Page
Using the radio P. 210
Using the CD player P. 217
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 225
Operating an iPod P. 233
Operating a USB memory P. 240
Optimal use of the audio system P. 248
Using the AUX port P. 253
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 255
208
3-2. Using the audio system
Language settings (type B and C)
The language used for all voice guidance, voice recognition and mes-
sages may be changed.
Press .
Press (MORE).
Press (LANG).
Press the that corresponds to the desired language.
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
“ENG” (English) or “ESP” (Spanish)
For vehicles sold in Canada
“ENG” (English) or “FRAN” (French)
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
209
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas-
semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is
off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
210
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Type A
Type B and C
Volume
Seeking a frequency
Station selector
AM/FM mode buttons
Adjusting the frequency
Power
Scanning for receivable stations
Power Volume Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
Seeking a frequency
Displaying radio
text messages
AM/FM/SAT
mode button
Scanning for
receivable stations
Station selector
Setting preset buttons Changing the channel category
211
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Type A
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing “∧”
or “∨” on .
Press and hold the button (from to ) the station
is to be set to until you hear a beep.
Type B and C
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing “∧”
or “∨” on .
Press and hold the button (from to ) the station
is to be set to until you hear a beep.
Each time is pressed, station pages are changed. There
are a total of 6 pages.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold or until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press or
once again.
■Scanning all radio stations within range
Press or .
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press or
once again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
212
3-2. Using the audio system
■Displaying radio text messages (for type B and C, FM mode
only)
When a new radio text message is received, “MSG” is shown on
the display. To display the message, press .
If the text continues past the end of the display, “ ” is displayed. Press
and hold until you hear a beep.
Text messages are not displayed while driving.
XM® Satellite Radio (type B and C)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press .
The display changes as follows each time is
pressed.
AM → FM → XM
Turn to select the desired channel in all the categories,
or press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired channel in
the current category.
■Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold a button
(from to ) until you hear a beep.
■Changing the channel category
Press “∧” or “∨” on the .
STEP
1
STEP
2
213
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning channels in the current category
Press .
When the desired channel is reached, press
again.
●Scanning preset channels
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press
again.
■Displaying text information
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Title (song/program title) → Name (artist name/feature)/Title (song/pro-
gram title).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
214
3-2. Using the audio system
■When the battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased. (type A only)
■Reception sensitivity
●Type B and C ⎯ Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially
metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■XM® Satellite Radio (type B and C)
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 con-
tiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A. ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
Canada ⎯
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a
problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID
number will appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accom-
panying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
215
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■If XM® Satellite Radio does not operate normally (type B and C)
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the dis-
play. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested
corrective action.
ANTENNA
or
CHECK
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check
whether the XM® antenna cable is attached
securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the sur-
rounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified
dealer.
UPDATING
or
CHANNEL NOT
AUTHORIZED
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite
Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest
encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is
canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all
free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not autho-
rized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium chan-
nel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio.
NO SIGNAL
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
or
CHANNEL OFF
AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any
programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/fea-
ture associated with the channel at that time. No
action needed.
216
3-2. Using the audio system
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada).
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:
●Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
---
or
CHANNEL NOT
AVAILABLE
The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to
the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not
change automatically, select another channel.
217
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the CD player
Type A
Type B and C
Volume
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Power
CD eject
Displaying text messages
Searching playback
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
Power Volume CD load
(type C only)
Searching playback
CD eject
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding and rewinding
Displaying text
messages
Selector buttons
Playback Playback/pause
Selecting a track
218
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading CDs
■Loading a CD
Type A and B
Insert a CD.
Type C
Press .
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.
■Loading multiple CDs (type C only)
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green,
insert a CD.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
When the indicator on the slot turns from amber to green
again, insert the next CD.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To cancel, press . If you do not insert a disc within 15 sec-
onds, loading will be canceled automatically.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
219
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Ejecting CDs
■Ejecting a CD
Type A and B
Press and remove the CD.
Type C
To select the CD to be ejected, press ( ) or
().
The selected CD number is shown on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
■Ejecting all the CDs (type C only)
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the
CDs.
Selecting a track
Press “∧” to move up or “∨” to move down using or
until the desired track number is displayed.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “∧” or “∨” on or
.
STEP
1
STEP
2
220
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning tracks
Press or .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press or again.
Press or again when the desired track is
reached.
Selecting a CD (type C only)
■Selecting a CD to play
Press ( ) or ( ).
■Scanning loaded CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
To cancel, press again.
Press again when the desired CD is reached.
Playing and pausing tracks (type B and C)
Press .
Random playback
■Current CD
Press (RAND) or (RDM).
Songs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
221
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■All CDs (type C only)
Press (RDM) twice.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
■Repeating a track
Press (RPT) or (RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).
■Repeating all of the tracks on a CD (type C only)
Press (RPT) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Switching the display
Press or .
Each time or is pressed, the display changes in the
following order:
Type A: Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track name.
Type B and C: Track title → Track name/Artist name → Track name/
Elapsed time.
222
3-2. Using the audio system
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or
for 1 second or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If or is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not
been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12
characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
■Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press or . Contact your
Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played
back.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
223
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7
in. (12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
224
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
●Do not insert more than one CD at a
time.
225
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Type B and C
Volume
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Power
CD eject
Displaying text messages
Searching playback
Selecting a file
Selecting a folder
Selecting a file/
fast-forwarding and rewinding
Power Volume
Displaying text messages
CD eject
Playback
Playback/pause
Selecting a file
CD load
(type C only)
Selector buttons
Selecting a
folder
Searching playback
Selecting a file/
fast-forwarding and rewinding
226
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 2 1 8
Selecting MP3 and WMA discs (type C only)
→P. 2 2 0
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press “∧” or “∨” on or to select the desired folder.
■Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold or until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press or
again.
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on or until you hear a beep.
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting one file at a time
Turn or , or press “∧” or “∨” on or to
select the desired file.
STEP
1
STEP
2
227
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press or .
When the desired file is reached, press or
once again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “∧” or “∨” on or
.
Playing and pausing files (type B and C)
Press .
Random playback
■Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press (RAND) or (RDM).
To cancel, press the button once more (type A and B), or twice more
(type C).
■Playing all of the files on a disc in random order
Type A and B
Press and hold (RAND) or (RDM) until you hear a
beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type C
Press (RDM) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
228
3-2. Using the audio system
Repeat play
■Repeating a file
Press (RPT) or (RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more (type A), twice more (type B) or
three times (type C).
■Repeating all of the files on a folder
Type A
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B and C
Press (RPT) twice.
To cancel, press the button once more (type B), or twice more (type C).
■Repeating all of the files in a disc (type C only)
Press (RPT) three times.
To cancel, press the same button again.
Switching the display
Press or .
Each time or is pressed, the display changes in the
following order:
Type A: Folder no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name →
Album title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.
Type B and C: Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album
name (MP3 only) → Track title/Elapsed time.
229
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Display (type A only)
→P. 222
■Error messages
“CD CHECK”:This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in the CD.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press or . Contact your
Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played.
■Discs that can be used
→P. 222
■CD player protection feature
→P. 222
■If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
→P. 222
■Lens cleaners
→P. 223
230
3-2. Using the audio system
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
231
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
232
3-2. Using the audio system
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
→P. 223
■CD player precautions
→P. 224
233
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Operating an iPod∗
∗: If equipped
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■Connecting an iPod
Open the cover and connect
an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
234
3-2. Using the audio system
■Control panel
Power Volume Selector knob
Displaying text messages
Selector buttons
Playback
Playback/pause
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
235
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
Press (BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.
Press that corresponds to the desired play mode.
Pressing (MORE) to change to the second selection list.
■Play mode list
Depending on the model, the name of your iPod may be displayed at
the top of the list.
Play mode First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
PLIST Playlist
select
Songs
select --
ARTIST Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select -
ALBUM Albums
select
Songs
select --
GENRE Genre select Artists select Albums
select
Songs
select
SONGS Songs
select ---
PODCST Albums
select
Songs
select --
COMPSR Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs
select -
BOOK Songs
select ---
STEP
1
STEP
2
236
3-2. Using the audio system
■Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.
To return to the previous selection list, press ( ).
Selecting songs from a song list
Press (LIST).
The current playlist is displayed.
Turn to select the desired song.
Pressing returns the screen from list display to the previous
screen.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
237
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting songs
Turn or press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired song.
Playing and pausing songs
Press .
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on .
Shuffle playback
■Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order
Press (RDM).
To cancel, press the button twice.
■Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order
Press (RDM) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
Press (RPT).
To cancel, press the button again.
Even when the repeat play option has not been selected, playback will
automatically continue from the first song in the current play list once the
last song has ended.
238
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
■About iPod
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
●iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-
tries.
■iPod functions
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve some malfunctions.
■iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Man-
ual.
■Error messages
“iPod ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod, inside the
USB box or the connection between them.
“NO SONGS”: This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod.
“UPDATE YOUR iPod”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not
compatible.
239
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Compatible models
Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some
models listed above might be incompatible with this system.
iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.
iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this
system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
●Maximum number of lists in a device: 9999
●Maximum number of songs in a device: 65025
●Maximum number of songs per list: 65025
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not connect the iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to iPod
●Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become
high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
Model Generation Software version
iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or higher
iPod nano 1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or higher
2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher
3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher
iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher
240
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory∗
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
■Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
∗: If equipped
241
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Control panel
Power Volume Selector knob
Displaying text messages
Playback Playback/pause
Searching playback
Selector buttons
Selecting a
folder
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding and rewinding
242
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting a folder
Press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired folder.
■Returning to the first file of the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on until you hear a beep.
■Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting a file
Turn or press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired file.
■Scanning the files in a folder
Press .
The first ten seconds of each file will be played.
To cancel, press again.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
Playing and pausing files
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
243
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on .
Random playback
■Playing files from a folder in random order
Press (RDM).
To cancel, press the button twice.
■Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order
Press (RDM) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Repeat play
■Repeating a file
Press (RPT).
To cancel, press the button twice.
■Repeating all the files in a folder
Press (RPT) twice.
To cancel, press the button again.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
244
3-2. Using the audio system
■USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it
once again may resolve some malfunctions.
■Error messages
“USB ERROR”: This indicates a problem either in the USB memory or
inside the USB box or connection between them.
“NO SUPPORT”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.
■USB memory
●Compatible device
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
Depending on the type of USB device, playback may not be possible.
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folder in device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in device: 65025
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
245
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,
MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
246
3-2. Using the audio system
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is plugged in, all files in the
USB memory device are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the
first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files
or create any unnecessary folders.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not use a USB memory, or connect a USB memory.
247
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to a USB memory
●Do not leave a USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
248
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Type B and C
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
Selector buttons
Menu button
249
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the audio control function
■Changing sound quality modes
Type A
Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following
order.
“BAS”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”→“ASL”
Type B and C
Press .
Press the that corresponds to the desired mode.
“BASS”, “MID” (type C only), “TREB”, “FADE”, or “BAL”
■Adjusting sound quality
Turning or adjusts the level.
Type A
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or
CD mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
BAS Bass* -5 to 5 Low High
TRE Treble* -5 to 5
FAD
Front/rear
volume
balance
R7 to F7 Shifts to rear Shifts to
front
BAL
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
250
3-2. Using the audio system
Type B and C
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio
mode.
■Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Type A
When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the
amount of “ASL” in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
BASS Bass* -5 to 5
Low HighMID Mid-range*
(type C only) -5 to 5
TREB Treble* -5 to 5
FADE
Front/rear
volume
balance
F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to
front
BAL
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
251
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Type B and C
Press .
Press (MORE).
Press (ASL).
Press the that corresponds to the desired mode.
Type B: “LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF”
Type C: “ON” or “OFF”
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according
to vehicle speed.
■Setting the number of preset pages (type B and C)
The number of preset pages desired can be set from 1 to 6. The initial
setting is 6 pages.
Press .
Press (MORE).
Press (PRESET).
Press the that corresponds to the desired number of
preset pages.
■Language settings (type B and C)
→P. 2 0 8
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
252
3-2. Using the audio system
■Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (provided to the audio models
with SRS Labs technology)
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUSTM and SRS TruBass® audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbols are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
253
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
Type A
Type B and C
STEP
1
254
3-2. Using the audio system
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
Type A
Press .
Type B and C
Press .
STEP
2
STEP
2
255
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the steering wheel audio switches∗
∗: If equipped
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Type A
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks,
files (MP3 and WMA) and
discs (type C only)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode:
Selects files and fold-
ers
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects tracks and
albums
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
256
3-2. Using the audio system
Turning on the power
Press or when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding or down
until you hear a beep.
Type B
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks,
files (MP3 and WMA) and
discs (type C only)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode:
Selects files and fold-
ers
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects tracks and
albums
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
257
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Changing the audio source
Press or when the audio system is turned on. The
audio source changes as follows each time or is
pressed.
Type A
FM→CD→AUX→AM
Type B and C
FM→SAT→CD (type B)→CD changer (type C)
→Bluetooth® Audio→AUX→USB/iPod→AM
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on or to increase the volume and “-” to
decrease the volume.
Press and hold or to continue increasing or decreasing
the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press or to select radio mode.
Press “∧” or “∨” on or to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold or
until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
258
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
Press or to select CD, iPod, USB memory or
Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press “∧” or “∨” on or to select the desired
track/file or song.
Selecting a folder or album
Press or to select CD, USB memory or
Bluetooth® audio mode.
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on or until you hear a
beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player (type C only)
Press to select CD mode.
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
259
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system∗
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the portable player is switched off
●If the portable player is not connected
●If the portable player’s battery is low
●If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
●If metal is covering or touching the portable player
The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on
a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your por-
table player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio sys-
tem will not function.
Title Page
Using the Bluetooth® audio system P. 262
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 267
Setting up a Bluetooth® enabled portable player P. 269
Bluetooth® audio system setup P. 274
∗: If equipped
260
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (→P. 300)
■About Bluetooth®
■Compatible models
●Bluetooth® specifications:
Ver. 1.2
●Following Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Ver.
1.3 or higher recommended)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
■Certification for the Bluetooth® audio system
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
261
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply with-
out maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
■Caution while driving
Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
262
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■Audio unit
Display
Track title, Artist name,
Album name, Elapsed time,
“Streaming Audio”, etc. is
displayed.
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth-Audio connec-
tion condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth® audio system
cannot be used.
■Microphone
Vehicles with moon roof
263
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Operating the system using voice commands
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable the operation of the Bluetooth® audio sys-
tem without the need to check the display or operate .
■Operation procedure when using voice commands
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■Auxiliary commands when using voice commands
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the Bluetooth® audio setup
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
Vehicles without moon roof
264
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio system for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio system, it is necessary to register
a Bluetooth® enabled portable player in the system. Follow the proce-
dure below to register (pair) a portable player:
Press and hold until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
Press (SETUP).
The introductory guidance and portable player name registration
instructions are heard.
Select “Pair Audio Players (Pair audio player)” using a voice
command or .
Register a portable player name by either of the following
methods:
a. Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to
be registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say the name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the portable player is heard.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
265
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Input the passkey into the portable player.
Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the oper-
ation of the portable player.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
If the portable player has a Bluetooth® phone, the phone can be reg-
istered at the same time. (→P. 283)
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio system
“BT Audio Setup” can be canceled by pressing the on-hook switch or
saying the voice command, “Cancel”.
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation details
Setup
(Setup)
BT Audio
Setup
(BT audio
setup)
Pair Audio
Players (Pair
audio player)
Registering a portable player
Select Audio
Player
Selecting a portable player to
be used
Change Name Changing the registered
name of a portable player
List Audio
Players
Listing the registered porta-
ble players
Set Passkey Changing the passkey
Delete Audio
Player
Deleting a registered porta-
ble player
System
Setup
Guidance Vol-
ume
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
Device Name Displaying the Bluetooth®
device address and name
Reset Setting Initializing the system
STEP
6
266
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
■When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine.
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■Situations where the system may not recognize your voice
●When driving on rough roads
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■Operations that cannot be performed while driving
●Operating the system with
●Registering a portable player to the system
■Changing the passkey
→P. 272
267
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Selecting an album
Press “∨” or “∧” on .
Selecting tracks
Press “∧” or “∨” on .
Playing and pausing tracks
Press .
VolumePower
Playback/pause
Displaying text messages
Selector knob
Selecting an
album
Selecting a track/
fast-forwarding and
reversing
Playback
268
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on .
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track title → Track title/Artist name → Track title/Album name → Track
title/Elapsed time
Using the steering wheel audio switches
→P. 2 5 5
■Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
269
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Setting up a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Registering a portable player in the Bluetooth® audio system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-
istered portable players:
■Functions and operation procedures
Press and hold until “BT AUDIO” is displayed.
Press (SETUP).
Select one of the following functions using a voice com-
mand or .
●Registering a portable player
“Pair Audio Players (Pair audio player)”
●Selecting a portable player to be used
“Select Audio Player”
●Changing the registered name of a portable player
“Change Name”
●Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio Players”
●Changing the passkey
“Set Passkey”
●Deleting a registered portable player
“Delete Audio Player”
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
270
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Registering a portable player
Select “Pair Audio Players (Pair audio player)” using a voice com-
mand or , and perform the procedure for registering a portable
player. (→P. 264)
Selecting a portable player to be used
Select “Select Audio Player” using a voice command or
.
Select the portable player to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-
table player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List audio players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
271
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Press the talk switch and say “From car” or “From audio”, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Vehicles with smart key system: If “From car” is selected, the porta-
ble player will be automatically connected whenever the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in either ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system: If “From car” is selected, the por-
table player will be automatically connected whenever the engine
switch is in either the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Changing the registered name of a portable player
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Select the name of the portable player to be changed by
either of the following methods, and select “Confirm” using a
voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-
table player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List audio players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using ,
and say the new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
272
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio Players” using a voice command or . The
list of registered portable players will be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT Audio Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a portable player is being
read aloud selects the portable player, and the following functions will
become available:
●Selecting a portable player: “Select Audio Player”
●Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
●Deleting a portable player: “Delete Audio Player”
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
273
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
3
Interior features
Deleting a registered portable player
Select “Delete Audio Player” using a voice command or
.
Select the portable player to be deleted by either of the follow-
ing methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired por-
table player.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List audio players”. When the
name of the desired portable player is read aloud, press the
talk switch.
If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth® phone,
the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.
A voice guidance instruction to delete a mobile phone is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
■The number of portable players that can be registered
Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
274
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system setup
■System setup items and operation procedures
→P. 298
275
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) features
∗
This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and
the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
■Hands-free system quick guide
Setting a cellular phone. (→P. 279)
Adding an entry to the phonebook (Up to 20 names can be
stored). (→P. 302)
Dialing by inputting a name. (→P. 290)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
∗: If equipped
276
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Title Page
Using the hands-free phone system
■Operating the system using a voice
command
■Using the hands-free phone system for
the first time
■Menu list of the hands-free phone
system
P. 279
Making a phone call
■Dialing by inputting a number
■Dialing by inputting a name
■Speed dialing
■When receiving a phone call
■Transferring a phone call
■Using the call history
P. 289
Setting a cellular phone
■Registering a cellular phone
■Selecting a cellular phone to be used
■Changing a registered name
■Listing the registered cellular phones
■Deleting a cellular phone
■Changing the passkey
■Turning the hands-free phone
automatic connection on/off
P. 293
Security and system setup
■Setting or changing the PIN
■Locking or unlocking the phone book
■Setting voice guidance volume
■Initialization
P. 298
Using the phone book
■Adding a new phone number
■Setting speed dials
■Changing a registered name
■Deleting registered data
■Deleting speed dials
■Listing the registered data
P. 302
277
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the cellular phone is switched off
●If you are outside service range
●If the cellular phone is not connected
●If the cellular phone's battery is low
●If the cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box
●If metal is covering or touching the cellular phone
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed.
■Required profiles for the cellular phone
●HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
●OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
■About Bluetooth®
■Certification for the hands-free phone system
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
278
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure. This equipment complies with FCC/
IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply with-
out maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that
it should be installed and operated with at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) and more
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
■Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high resulting in damage to the phone.
279
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the hands-free phone system∗
■Audio unit
Display
A message, name, phone
number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters, such as
an umlaut, cannot be dis-
played.
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Bluetooth® connection con-
dition and reception level
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
∗: If equipped
280
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Steering wheel telephone switches
Type A
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted by using
this switch.
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
281
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Type B
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted by using
this switch.
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
Talk switch
Turns the voice command
system on (press)/turns the
voice command system off
(press and hold)
■Microphone
Vehicles with moon roof
282
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Operating the system using a voice command
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands enable the operation of the hands-free phone sys-
tem without the need to check the display or operate .
■Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press the talk switch and follow voice guidance instructions.
■Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
“Cancel”: Exits the hands-free phone system
“Repeat”: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
“Go back”: Returns to the previous procedure
“Help”: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
Vehicles without moon roof
283
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register
a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be
entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular
phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular
phone:
Press the off-hook switch or the talk switch.
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions
are heard.
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or .
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” using , and say a name to be
registered.
b. Press the talk switch and say a name to be registered.
Voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
284
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Registration to the hands-free phone system only
Select “Phone Only” using a voice command or .
Registration to the hands-free phone system and Bluetooth®
audio system at the same time
Select “Int. Audio (Internal audio)” using a voice command or
.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
STEP
5
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
285
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■Normal operation
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
CallBack
(Call
back)
--
Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
Redial - - Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
Dial by
Number - - Dialing by inputting a number
Dial by
Name
(Dial by
name)
--
Dialing by inputting a name
registered in the phone book
Phonebook
Add Entry - Adding a new number
Change
Name -Changing a name in the
phone book
Delete
Entry -Deleting the phone book
data
Delete
Speed
Dial
-Deleting a registered speed
dial
List
Names - Listing the phone book data
Speed
Dial
(Set
speed
dial)
- Registering a speed dial
286
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setup
(Setup)
Security
Set PIN Setting a PIN code
Phonebook Lock
(Phone book
lock)
Locking the phone book
Phonebook
Unlock (Phone
book unlock)
Unlocking the phone book
Phone
Setup
Pair Phone Registering the cellular
phone to be used
Change Phone
Name (Change
name)
Changing the registered
name of a cellular phone
Delete Phone Deleting a registered cellular
phone
List Phones Listing the registered cellular
phones
Select Phone Selecting a cellular phone to
be used
Set Passkey Changing the passkey
Handsfree
Power
Turning the Hands-free
power on/off
System
Setup
Guidance Vol-
ume
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
Device Name Displaying a device’s infor-
mation
Reset Setting Initialization
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
287
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Using a short cut key
First menu Second menu Operation detail
Dial “XXX (name)” - Dialing a number registered
in the phone book
Dial “XXX (number)” - Dialing the input numbers
Phone book add
entry - Adding a new number
Phone book change
name -
Changing the name of a
phone number in the phone
book
Phone book delete
entry - Deleting phone book data
Phone book set
speed dial - Registering a speed dial
Phone book delete
speed dial - Deleting a speed dial
Phone book List
names - Listing the phone book data
288
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed reaches 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume auto-
matically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when
vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■When using a voice command
For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
∗ (star), and + (plus).
Say the command correctly and clearly.
■Situations that the system may not recognize your voice
●When driving on a rough road
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■Operations that cannot be performed while driving
●Operating the system with
●Registering a cellular phone to the system
■Changing the passkey
→P. 296
289
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a number
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by number”.
Press the talk switch and say the phone number.
■Making a phone call
●Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by Number”
●Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by Name (Dial by name)”
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history
“Redial”
●Dialing a number stored in the incoming history
“CallBack (Callback)”
■Receiving a phone call
●Answering a phone
●Refusing a phone call
■Transferring a phone call
■Using the call history
●Dialing
●Storing data in the phone book
●Deleting
STEP
1
STEP
2
290
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using .
Dialing by inputting a name
Press the talk switch and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say a registered name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List names”. Press the talk
switch while the desired name is being read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press the off-hook switch.
b. Press the talk switch and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using .
Speed dialing
Press the off-hook switch.
Press the preset button to which the desired number is regis-
tered.
Press the off-hook switch.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
291
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
When receiving a phone call
■Answering a phone call
Press the off-hook switch.
■Refusing a phone call
Press the on-hook switch.
Transferring a phone call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
b. Press the off-hook switch*1.
c. Press the talk switch and say “Call transfer”*2.
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the cellular phone to the system during a call.
*2: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the cellular phone. Also, this operation is invalid
while dialing or receiving a call.
Using the call history
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history:
Press the talk switch and say “Redial” (when using a number
stored in the outgoing call history) or “Callback” (when using a
number stored in the incoming call history).
STEP
1
292
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-
played.
b. Select the desired number using .
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using a voice
command or .
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” using a voice
command or .
Deleting: Select “Delete” using a voice command or .
■Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming call his-
tory memories.
■When talking on the phone
●Do not talk at the same time as the other party.
●Keep the volume of the incoming voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
STEP
2
293
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or , and perform
the procedure for registering a cellular phone. (→P. 283)
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-
istered cellular phones:
■Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
●Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Pair Phone”
●Selecting the cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Select Phone”
●Changing a registered name
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Change Phone
Name (Change name)”
●Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “List Phones”
●Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Delete Phone”
●Changing the passkey
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Set Passkey”
●Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Phone Setup” → 3. “Handsfree
Power”
294
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
Select “Select Phone” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Pattern B
Select a cellular phone to be used using .
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Phone Name (Change name)” using a voice
command or .
Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by either
of the following methods:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired phone name, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the
desired phone name is being read aloud, press the talk
switch.
c. Select the desired phone name using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
295
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Press the talk switch or select “Record Name” using ,
and say a new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Listing the registered cellular phones
Selecting “List Phones” using a voice command or causes the
list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing the talk switch while the name of a cellular phone is being
read selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be
available:
• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete Phone”
STEP
3
STEP
4
296
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Deleting a cellular phone
Select “Delete Phone” using a voice command or .
Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the name of the desired cellu-
lar phone.
b. Press the talk switch and say “List phones”. While the name
of the desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Press the talk switch, say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
297
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Turning the hands-free phone automatic connection on/off
■Turning off the automatic connection
Select “Handsfree Power” using a voice command or .
Select “Turn off” using a voice command or .
■Turning on the automatic connection
Select “Handsfree Power” using a voice command or .
Select “Turn on” using a voice command or .
■The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
298
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Security and system setup
Setting or changing the PIN
■Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or .
Enter a PIN using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
■Security setting items and operation procedure
●Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Set PIN”
●Locking the phone book
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Lock
(Phone book lock)”
●Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “Security” → 3. “Phonebook Unlock
(Phone book unlock)”
■System setup items and operation procedure
●Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Guidance Vol-
ume”
●Initialization
1. “Setup (Setup)” → 2. “System Setup” → 3. “Reset Settings”
can only be used for system setup operation.
STEP
1
STEP
2
299
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or .
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or .
Enter a new PIN using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phonebook Lock (Phone book lock)” or “Phonebook
Unlock (Phone book unlock)” using a voice command or
.
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
300
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Volume” using .
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
Initialization
Select “Reset Settings” and then “Confirm” using .
Select “Confirm” using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
301
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Initialization
●The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered cellular phone data
• Security code
●Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored
to its original state.
■When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
●Dialing by inputting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the call history
●Using the phone book
302
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
●Inputting a phone number by using a voice command
●Transferring data from the cellular phone
●Inputting a phone number using
●Selecting a phone number from the outgoing or incoming call his-
tory
■Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or .
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
●Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Add Entry”
●Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)”
●Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Change Name”
●Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Entry”
●Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “Delete Speed Dial”
●Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” → 2. “List Names”
STEP
1
303
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone num-
ber:
Inputting a telephone number using a voice command
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice (By voice)” using a voice command
or .
STEP2-2 Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and
select “Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
command or .
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for
the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data using .
STEP
2
304
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Inputting a phone number using
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using .
STEP2-2 Input a phone number using , and press
once again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing Call History (Outgoing)” or “Incom-
ing Call History (Incoming)” using a voice command
or .
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired
data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a
voice command.
b. Select the desired data using .
305
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Select the name to be registered by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press the talk switch and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using , and say the desired
name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
In , selecting “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)” instead of “Con-
firm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
Setting speed dials
Select “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)” using a voice command
or .
Select data to be registered as a speed dial by either of the
following methods:
a. Press the talk switch, say the desired number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired data using .
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
306
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Select a desired preset button, and register the data into
speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” using
a voice command or .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Select a name to be changed by either of the following meth-
ods:
a. Press the talk switch, say the desired name, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
b. Press the talk switch, and say “List names”. While the
desired name is being read aloud, press the talk switch,
and select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired name using .
Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.
Say a new name, and select “Confirm” using a voice com-
mand or .
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
307
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Deleting registered data
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or .
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press the talk switch, and say the name of the desired
phone number to be deleted.
b. Press the talk switch, say “List phones”. While the name of
the desired phone number is being read aloud, press the
talk switch.
Deleting speed dials
Select “Delete Speed Dial” using a voice command or .
Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is reg-
istered, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
308
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” using a voice command causes a list of the
registered data to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing the talk switch while the desired data is being read aloud
selects the data, and the following function will become available.
• Dialing: “Dial”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
• Setting a speed dial: “Speed Dial (Set speed dial)”
■Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
309
3
Interior features
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Interior light (→P. 3 11 )
Personal lights or personal/interior lights (→P. 311, 312)
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key
system)
310
3-5. Using the interior lights
■Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without moon roof
The interior light (with the switch in the “DOOR” position) and “ENGINE
START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key system) automatically
turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode (vehicles with
smart key system) or engine switch position (vehicles without smart key sys-
tem), the presence of the electronic key (vehicles with smart key system),
whether the doors are locked/unlocked (vehicles with power door lock sys-
tem) and whether the doors are open/closed.
Vehicles with moon roof
The interior light, personal/interior lights (with the switch in the “DOOR” posi-
tion) and “ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem) automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode (vehicles with smart key system) or engine switch position (vehicles
without smart key system), the presence of the electronic key (vehicles with
smart key system), whether the doors are locked/unlocked (vehicles with
power door lock system) and whether the doors are open/closed.
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior light, personal/interior lights (vehicles with moon roof) and
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key system)
remain on when the door is not fully closed and the switch is in the “DOOR”
position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 495)
311
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Interior light
“DOOR” position
Off
On
Personal lights (vehicles without moon roof)
On/off
Interior light and personal lights
312
3-5. Using the interior lights
Personal/interior lights (vehicles with moon roof)
■Interior lights
“DOOR” position
Off
On
■Personal lights
On/off
Personal/interior lights
313
3
Interior features
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Bottle holders
Cup holders
Console box
314
3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box
Pull up the lever.
Console box
Type A
Lift the lid while pulling the lever.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Glove box and console box
315
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Type B
Lift the lid while pulling the lever.
Lift the lid and tray.
Lift the lid.
Pull the tray up to open the box.
■When using the console box lid as an armrest (type B only)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
If necessary, the console box lid can slide
forward. Pull the lid forward by grasping
the front of the lid.
Console box
316
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front
Rear
Pull the lid to open.
Cup holders
317
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
■Adjusting the size of the cup holder (front)
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
■When not in use
Keep the rear cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Remove the cup support.
Change the cup support position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Cup holders
318
3-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Pull up the lever.
Type B (if equipped)
Pull the lid.
Type C (vehicles with moon roof)
Push the lid.
Auxiliary boxes
319
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Type D
Pull up the lever.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■Items unsuitable for storing (type C only)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.
Auxiliary boxes
320
3-6. Using the storage features
Bottle holders
Front
Rear
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than pet bottles in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
Bottle holders
321
3
Interior features
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and
swing to the side.
322
3-7. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
323
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Clock
■The clock is displayed when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
Adjusts the hour
Adjusts the minutes
324
3-7. Other interior features
Ashtray∗
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■To prevent fire
●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
Pull the lid to open.
Pull the ashtray to remove.
∗: If equipped
325
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Cigarette lighter∗
■The cigarette lighter can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the lid closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■To avoid burns or fires
●Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
●Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
●Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
Pull the lid to open, and push
the cigarette lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
∗: If equipped
326
3-7. Other interior features
Power outlet∗
■The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
∗: If equipped
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.
327
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Seat heaters∗
■The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Heats the driver’s seat
Heats the front passenger’s
seat
The indicator light is on while
the seat heater is operating.
Push the switch once again to
turn off the seat heater.
∗: If equipped
328
3-7. Other interior features
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
329
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver's floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
The shape of the retaining
hooks (clips) and the fixing
procedure of the floor mat for
your vehicle may differ from
those shown in the illustration.
For details, refer to the floor
mat retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
●Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the right place with all the pro-
vided retaining hooks (clips). Be espe-
cially careful to perform this check after
cleaning the floor.
●With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission), fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.
330
3-7. Other interior features
Compass∗
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.
■Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
■Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
∗: If equipped
331
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according
to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in the illustration, the compass
will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 6
seconds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.
Press “AUTO” and, referring to the map above, select the
number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
332
3-7. Other interior features
■Circling calibration
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 9
seconds.
C appears on the compass dis-
play.
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is dis-
played.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
■Conditions unfavorable for correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following situations:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.)
●The battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
333
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle
is stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the
neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling
calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the anti-glare inside rear
view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■To ensure normal operation of the compass
●Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
334
3-7. Other interior features
336
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
●Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
■Aluminum wheels
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition.
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
337
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to
the lenses.
338
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
■Synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
339
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-
ble.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical
components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 8 6 )
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
340
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or
alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor
the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part's painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
●Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax, on the
upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior
heats up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
341
4
Maintenance and care
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
■General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by your-
self or by a Toyota dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the
maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
342
4-2. Maintenance
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
■Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch OFF with
the trip meter A reading shown.
While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 147), turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch ON.
Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays
000000.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
343
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Warning in handling of battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P. 366)
344
4-2. Maintenance
ce
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Check the connections.
(→P. 366)
Brake fluid At the correct level? (→P. 363)
Engine coolant At the correct level? (→P. 362)
Engine oil At the correct level? (→P. 358)
Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter?
(→P. 363)
Washer fluid At the correct level? (→P. 368)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
345
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clear-
ance and correct amount of free
play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when
applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Clutch pedal • Moves smoothly?
Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system oper-
ate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats • Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
346
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors/trunk • Operate smoothly?
Engine hood • The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after park-
ing?
Tires
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
347
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
347
4
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (→P. 366)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (→P. 363)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (→P. 362)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level (→P. 358)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding oil)
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Fuses (→P. 390) • Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Radiator and condenser
(→P. 363) ⎯
Tire inflation pressure (→P. 378) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (→P. 368)
• Water washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
●Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles with smart key system: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 363)
Vehicles without smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is OFF. With
the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may auto-
matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (→P. 363)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due
to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-
ment.
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into the
slot.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
353
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■Front
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
■Rear
Take out the jack attachment.
STEP
1
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Set the jack attachment on the
floor jack with the “FOR-
WARD” facing towards the
front of the vehicle, and place
the jack.
Before raising the vehicle,
make sure that the floor jack is
positioned so that the jack
point fits securely inside the
groove on the jack attach-
ment.
STEP
2
Front of vehicle
STEP
3
355
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or seri-
ous injury.
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported
only by the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put
the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack other than the jack attachment.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
●Make sure to set the jack attachment
properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly
positioned floor jack will damage the
vehicle and may cause the vehicle to
fall off the floor jack.
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 362)
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 359)
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 363)
Fuse box (→P. 390)
Battery (→P. 366)
Radiator (→P. 363)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (→P. 363)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 358)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 368)
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 362)
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 359)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 358)
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 363)
Fuse box (→P. 390)
Battery (→P. 366)
Radiator (→P. 363)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (→P. 363)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 368)
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,
wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the
bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Low
Full
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Low
Full
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection →P. 473
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per
1000 km)
●If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp. qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (→P. 460)
■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain
cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and remove any foreign objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and may cause
burns.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Slide and lift up the rubber strip
to partly remove it as shown.
Disconnect the claws and
remove the service cover.
Remove the reservoir cap.
Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Ter m i nals
Hold-down clamp
Ground cable
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
■After recharging the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-
tem.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the low windshield washer fluid level
warning light comes on (if equipped), the washer tank may be empty.
Open the lid.
Add washer fluid.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
CAUTION
■When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine
etc.
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and inflation pressure if not
rotated.
■Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
■The tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that
uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low
tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (→P. 426)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitters.
Front
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota
dealer. (→P. 372)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when changing
the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (→P. 478)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart key system) or the engine switch to
the “ON” position (vehicles without smart key system).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Vehicles with smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with
the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch in the “ON” position, and then turn the
engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.
STEP
4
STEP
5
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 483)
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
■Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use
year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 174)
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified
level.
■If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-
ing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not flash 3 times.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20
minutes.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so
may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous han-
dling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
●Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pres-
sure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is
low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 371)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
■Low profile tires and wheels
Wheels with profile tires like 17-inch tires may cause greater damage
than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface.
Therefore pay attention to the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
●Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis-
played on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 478)
Type A
Type B
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level
adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride
and handling.
●Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal
for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have
been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Toyota, except for the compact spare tire, are
equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced,
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed.
(→P. 371)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
■Removal method
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
OFF.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
Remove the filter cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Checking interval
Replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
■Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.)
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery
Vehicles with smart key system: CR1632
Vehicles without smart key system: CR2025 (Type A)
CR2016 (Type B)
■Replacing the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
■Replacing the battery (vehicles without smart key system)
Remove the cover.
Remove the module.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type A
Open the case cover using a
flathead screwdriver pro-
tected with tape etc. and
remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery (CR2025)
with the “+” terminal facing up.
Type B
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery (CR2016)
with the “+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
STEP
3
389
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■If the key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■Use the following types of lithium battery
Vehicles with smart key system: CR1632
Vehicles without smart key system: CR2025 (Type A), CR2016 (Type B)
●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera
stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your
Toyota dealer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
OFF.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP
1
STEP
2
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the instrument panel.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (→P. 394) for details about which fuse to check.
Take out the pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
For type A and B fuses: Remove the fuse.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
STEP
6
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 CDS FAN 30 A Electric cooling fan(s)
2 RDI FAN 40 A Electric cooling fan(s)
3 ABS NO. 3 30 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system
4 ABS NO. 1 50 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system
5 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
6 ALT 120 A
Charging system, RDI FAN, CDS
FAN, ABS NO. 1, ABS NO. 3, HTR,
HTR SUB NO. 1, HTR SUB NO. 3,
ACC, CIG, ECU-IG NO. 2, HTR-IG,
WIPER, WASHER, ECU-IG NO. 1,
AM1, DOOR, STOP, FR DOOR,
POWER, RR DOOR, RL DOOR,
OBD, ACC-B, FR FOG, DEF, MIR
HTR, TAIL, PANEL, POWER OUT-
LET, PWR SEAT, SUNROOF
7 EPS 60 A Electric power steering
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
8 GLOW* 80 A No circuit
9 P/I 50 A EFI MAIN, HORN, IG2
10 H-LP MAIN 50 A H-LP LH LO, H-LP RH LO, H-LP
LH HI, H-LP RH HI
11 EFI NO. 2 10 A Emission control system
12 EFI NO. 1 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
13 H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
14 H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
15 H-LP RH LO 10 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
16 H-LP LH LO 10 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
17 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system
18 TURN-HAZ 10 A Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers
19 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
20 AM2 NO. 2 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system
21 AM2 30 A Starting system
22 STRG LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
23 IG2 NO.2 7.5 A Starting system
24 ECU-B2 10 A Air conditioning system
25 ECU-B 10 A
Main body ECU, gauge and meters,
clock
26 RAD NO. 1 15 A Audio system
27 DOME 10 A Trunk light, smart key system, inte-
rior light
28 AMP* 30 A Audio system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
*: If equipped
29 MAYDAY* 10 A No circuit
30 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse
31 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
32 SPARE 20 A Spare fuse
33 EFI MAIN 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO. 1, EFI NO. 2
34 HORN 10 A Horn
35 IG2 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system, IGN,
METER
36 ST* 7.5 A No circuit
37 HTR SUB
NO. 1 30 A PTC heater
38 HTR SUB
NO. 3 30 A PTC heater
39
PWR
OUTLET/
INVERTER* 15 A Power outlet
PWR OUTLET*
Fuse Ampere Circuit
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 DEF 40 A Rear window defogger, MIR HTR
2 PWR SEAT 30 A Power seat
3 TAIL 10 A
Parking lights, tail lights, license
plate lights, front side marker lights,
multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, instrument cluster lights
4 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination
5 FR DOOR 20 A Power windows, moon roof
6 RL DOOR 20 A Power windows
7 RR DOOR 20 A Power windows
8 SUNROOF 20 A Moon roof
9 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter
10 ACC 7.5 A Outside rear view mirrors, audio
system, main body ECU
11 MIR HTR 10 A Outside rear view mirror defogger
12 IGN 7.5 A
Steering lock system, SRS airbag
system, multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, front passenger
occupant classification system
13 METER 7.5 A Gauge and meters
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
14 POWER 30 A Power windows
15 SEAT HTR 15 A Seat heater
16 HTR-IG 10 A Air conditioning system
17 WIPER 25 A Windshield wipers
18 WASHER 15 A Windshield washer
19 ECU-IG NO. 1 10 A
Automatic transmission, main body
ECU, electric power steering, elec-
tric cooling fan(s), shift lock control
system, anti-lock brake system, tire
pressure warning system, vehicle
stability control system, cruise con-
trol system
20 ECU-IG NO. 2 10 A
Back-up lights, charging system,
rear window defogger, air condi-
tioning system, multiport fuel injec-
tion system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, moon roof
21 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
22 STOP 10 A
Stop lights, high mounted stop-
light, anti-lock brake system, main
body ECU, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, shift lock control
system, vehicle stability control
system
23 DOOR 25 A Power door lock system
24 ACC-B 25 A CIG, ACC
25 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights
26 AM1 7.5 A Starting system, ACC, CIG
Fuse Ampere Circuit
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacing. (→P. 400)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer, as soon as possible.
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 479)
■Front bulb locations
Headlight high
beams and daytime
running lights
Headlight low beams
Front turn signal and parking lights
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Front side marker lights
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Rear bulb locations
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight low beams
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the bulb while depress-
ing the lock release.
■Headlight high beams and daytime running lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Unplug the bulb while depress-
ing the lock release.
■Front fog lights (if equipped)
Remove the fender liner bolts
and clip.
Partly remove the fender liner.
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the bulb while depress-
ing the lock release.
STEP
3
STEP
4
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Front turn signal/parking lights and front side marker lights
Turn the steering wheel away from the side being worked on.
This will move the tire to provide more room.
Remove the fender liner bolts and clips.
Partly remove the fender liner.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Front side marker light
Front turn signal/parking light
Remove the light bulb.
Front side marker light
Front turn signal/parking light
STEP
4
STEP
5
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, and rear turn signal
lights
Open the trunk lid.
Remove the luggage trim cover
clips. Partly remove the luggage
trim cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
Rear turn signal light
Remove the light bulb.
Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
Rear turn signal light
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Back-up light
Open the trunk lid and remove
the cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■License plate lights
Open the trunk lid and remove
the trunk panel cover clips.
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
■LED high mounted stoplight
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of
the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have
the light replaced.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■Removing and installing the fender liner clip
Type A
Type B
Removing
Installing
Removing
Installing
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
414
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.
5
When trouble arises
415
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be
in good condition. (→P. 418)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
416
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Towing eyelet
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Towing eyelet
5
When trouble arises
417
5-1. Essential information
■Emergency towing procedure
Release the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine
off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine
running) position.
CAUTION
■Caution while towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always
be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
418
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the front
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
■To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
NOTICE
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
5
When trouble arises
419
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the rear
Automatic transmission: Use a
towing dolly under the front
wheels.
Manual transmission: We recom-
mend to use a towing dolly under
the front wheels.
When not using a towing dolly,
turn the engine switch to the
“ACC” position and shift the shift
lever to N.
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
(automatic transmission)
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
■To prevent damaging the vehicle (manual transmission)
Do not tow the vehicle when the engine switch is in “LOCK” position or key
removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
420
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
421
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. Have the vehi-
cle checked and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
422
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a
near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the follow-
ing information:
●Engine speed
●Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●Vehicle speed
●To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●Position of the transmission shift lever
●Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●Driver's seat position
●SRS airbag deployment data
●SRS airbag system diagnostic data
●Front passenger's occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of
improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders,
the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between
passengers.
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects
of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining
optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event
data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car
crash event.
5
When trouble arises
423
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
●An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for
a leased vehicle) is obtained
●Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
●Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Toyota will:
●Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance
●Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-
closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed
necessary
●Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification informa-
tion to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes
424
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
425
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system (if
equipped).
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system; or
• The TRAC system.
(Flashes)
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
426
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
■When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly
hold and operate it using more force than usual.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 2.0 gal. (7.5
L, 1.7 lmp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
427
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(on the instru-
ment cluster)
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(on the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passen-
ger to fasten his or her
seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(Canada)
Low windshield washer
fluid level warning light
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
(U.S.A.)
Maintenance required
reminder light*3
Indicates that maintenance
is required accroding to the
driven distance on the main-
tenance schedule.
Illuminates for about 3 sec-
onds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approxi-
mately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the maintenance
data has been reset.
If necessary, perform main-
tenance.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km) after
the maintenance data has
been reset.
(The indicator will not work
properly unless the mainte-
nance data has been reset.)
Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the mainten-
ace data after the mainten-
ace is performed.
See page “Reset the main-
tenance data”
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
428
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that one or more of
the doors or trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzers:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts warning buzzers sound to alert
the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The
buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound at a different tone for 20 more seconds.
*3: Mainteance required reminder light:
Refer to the seperate “Schedule Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning
light (if equipped)
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system.
Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
429
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front pas-
senger occupant classification system, “PASSENGER AIR BAG ON”
indicator light, “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passen-
ger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P. 85)
■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passen-
ger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-
ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire
inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few
minutes.
■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used.
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
●If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used.
5
When trouble arises
431
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute fre-
quently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch is
turned ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features →P. 495) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen-
ger that the seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest Toyota dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
432
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
5
When trouble arises
433
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Once ⎯(Comes
on for 8
seconds.)
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is pressed.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key*.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than OFF and the electronic
key outside of the detection
area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s door
has been opened or closed
with the shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key
outside of the detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
OFF or con-
firm the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
5
When trouble arises
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be diffi-
culties receiving the signal from the key. (→P. 2 7 )
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Continuous
Continuous
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s door
has been opened or closed
with the shift lever not in P, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key
outside of the detection area.
• Shift the shift
lever to P.
• Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
*: The jack attachment is used when raising your vehicle with a
floor jack. (→P. 353)
Spare tire
Jack
Wheel nut
wrench
Jack handle
Jack
attachment*
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Remove the luggage floor cover.
Tighten
Loosen
STEP
1
STEP
2
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Remove the luggage floor cover.
Remove the tool tray.
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Vehicles with a steel wheel,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
STEP
1
Flat tire
Wheel
chock
positions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are
located under the rocker panel.
They indicate the jack point
positions.
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP
2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
STEP
4
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.
(→P. 478)
■If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the fol-
lowing steps and fit tire chains to the front tires.
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■After completing the tire change (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 371)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the light remains on.
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to
the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by a jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
5
When trouble arises
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury:
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a
serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or
wheel nuts.
●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and
the wheel may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death
or serious injury.
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for
use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
●Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●VSC
●TRAC
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
5
When trouble arises
447
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 371)
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting
procedure (→P. 129, 133) or releasing the steering lock (→P. 131,
135), confirm the following points.
■The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (→P. 129, 133)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 7 9 )
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The battery may be discharged. (→P. 454)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with smart
key system).
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse.
However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(→P. 449)
●The electronic key battery is depleted. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 453)
5
When trouble arises
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with smart key system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer.
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (→P. 454)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehi-
cles with smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (automatic transmission)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY mode.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “ACC” position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles
with the smart key system, bring the other key and the key number
stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles without the smart key
system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key
number plate.
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk with the
mechanical key
Doors
Using the mechanical key (→P.
21) in order to perform the fol-
lowing operations.
Locks all doors
Unlocks doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the
mechanical key (→P. 21) once
again within 3 seconds unlocks
the other doors.
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key (→P.
21) clockwise to open.
If communication between the electronic key and the vehicle is inter-
rupted (→P. 27) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure
below.
5
When trouble arises
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate
that the start function cannot
detect the electronic key that is
touched to the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch if any of the doors
is opened and closed while the
key is touched to the switch.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 5
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P. 130)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(→P. 386)
STEP
3
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following
the steps below.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Remove the engine cover.
Raise the rear of the engine
cover to remove the two rear
clips, and then raise the front
of the engine cover to remove
the two front clips.
STEP
5
STEP
1
5
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system: Open and close any of the
doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with smart key system) or turn the engine switch
to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart key system),
then start the vehicle's engine.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Avoiding a discharged battery
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned
off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the engine switch to the “ON” position, then start the vehi-
cle's engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
3
STEP
4
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery.
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the catalytic converter may
overheat and become a fire hazard.
■When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
■When attaching the engine cover (1.8L 4-cylinder [2ZR-FE] engine)
Ensure that the rubber grommets remain attached to the engine cover. If the
grommet is attached to the bolts, transfer grommets to the engine cover.
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam
subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the
engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
5
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
●Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injury such as burns.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
●Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (→P. 475)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
STEP
5
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion).
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic trans-
mission) or 1 or R position (manual transmission), release
the parking brake and carefully apply the accelerator to free
the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
●If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
5
When trouble arises
465
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Stop the engine by
turning the engine switch to
the “ACC” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
466
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the engine has to be turned off while driving
●Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
●Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as
doing so will lock the steering wheel.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: Stop the engine by press-
ing and holding the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch for 3
consecutive seconds or more.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more
STEP
4
STEP
5
468
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
*1: Unladen vehicles
*2: P195/65R15 tires
*3: P205/55R16 and P215/45R17 tires
*4: 2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine only
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
Overall length 179.0 in. (4546 mm)
Overall width 69.3 in. (1760 mm)
Overall height*157.7 in. (1465 mm)
Wheelbase 102.4 in. (2600 mm)
Tread
Front 60.3 in. (1531 mm)*2
59.8 in. (1519 mm)*3
Rear 60.4 in. (1534 mm)*2
59.9 in. (1522 mm)*3
Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage) 825 lb. (370 kg)
Towing capacity*4
(trailer weight + cargo weight) 1500 lb. (680 kg)
469
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Type A
On some models, this number is
stamped under the front passen-
ger seat.
Type B
On some models, this number is
stamped under the front passen-
ger seat.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label on the driver’s side
center pillar.
470
6-1. Specifications
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
471
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Engine
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
*: Drive belt tension measured with Borroughs drive belt tension gauge No.
BT-33-73F (used belt), lbf
Model 2ZR-FE engine
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.17 × 3.48 in. (80.5 × 88.3 mm)
Displacement 109.7 cu.in. (1798 cm3)
Drive belt tension* 143 ± 22 lbf (650 ± 100 N, 65 ± 10 kgf)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
Automatic adjustment
472
6-1. Specifications
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Fuel
Model 2AZ-FE engine
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.48 × 3.78 in. (88.5 × 96.0 mm)
Displacement 144.1 cu.in. (2362 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.007 ⎯ 0.011 in. (0.19 ⎯ 0.29 mm)
0.015 ⎯ 0.019 in. (0.38 ⎯ 0.48 mm)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
473
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Lubrication system
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯
reference)
With filter
Without filter
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp. qt.)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
3.8 qt. (3.6 L, 3.2 Imp. qt.)
Outside temperature
474
6-1. Specifications
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
SAE 5W-20 or SAE 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE
0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
The 0W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the
oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehi-
cle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
475
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
(Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
DENSO SC20HR11
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
DENSO SK20R11
NGK IFR6A11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
476
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Manual transaxle
Battery
Open voltage at
68°F (20°C):
12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Gear oil capacity (Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.0 qt. (1.9 L, 1.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
2.6 qt. (2.5 L, 2.2 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission
Gear Oil LV or equivalent
Recommended API grade GL-4
Recommended gear oil
viscosity SAE 75W
NOTICE
■Manual transaxle gear oil
Using manual transaxle gear oil other than “TOYOTA Genuine Manual
Transmission Gear Oil LV” may cause occurrence of idle rattling noise and
bad fuel consumption.
477
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Automatic transaxle
Clutch
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30
kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 44 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
Fluid capacity (Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
8.2 qt. (7.8 L, 6.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your
vehicle.
Pedal free play 0.2 ⎯ 0.6 in. (5 ⎯ 15 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Pedal clearance*13.4 in. (87 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*26 ⎯ 9 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
478
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Tires and wheels
Type A
Type B
Type C
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tire size P195/65R15 89S, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 15 × 6 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P205/55R16 89H, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P215/45R17 87W, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 × 7 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
479
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
A: HB4 halogen bulbs B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear) D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: H11 halogen bulbs F: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
9006
9005
51
60
A
B
Front side marker
lights ⎯5C
Front turn signal/park-
ing lights 3457NAK 28/8 D
Front fog lights
(if equipped) ⎯55 E
Rear turn signal lights ⎯21 D
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights 7443 21/5 C
License plate lights ⎯5C
Back-up lights 921 16 C
Interior
Personal lights or Per-
sonal/Interior lights ⎯8C
Interior light ⎯8F
Trunk light ⎯5C
480
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., the Europe and Japan have
developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
481
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems.
■Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline
●Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygen-
ate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
482
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that
stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor
hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
483
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (→P. 486)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 485)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 370)
484
6-1. Specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 373)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 478)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires (→P. 374)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (→P. 443)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
485
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
486
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
487
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
488
6-1. Specifications
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No.109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
489
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
490
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Tab le 1* below), and dividing by two
491
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
492
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
493
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM
E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Tes t r im
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
494
6-1. Specifications
*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
495
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Smart key
system (if
equipped)
(→P. 2 3 )
Smart key system On Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toy-
ota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.
496
6-2. Customization
Wireless
remote con-
trol (if
equipped)
(→P. 34)
Wireless remote control On Off
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
On Off
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off
Door lock buzzer On Off
Panic function On Off
Trunk unlocking func-
tion On Off
Trunk unlocking opera-
tion Press and hold
Press twice
One short press
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
497
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Door lock
(vehicles
with power
door lock
system)
(→P. 3 9 )
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function
(vehicles with smart key
system)
Off On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors Off On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors. (vehi-
cles with an automatic
transmission)
On Off
Shifting gears to posi-
tion other than P locks
all doors. (vehicles with
an automatic transmis-
sion)
On Off
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
498
6-2. Customization
Illumination
(→P. 309)
Time elapsed before
lights turn off (vehicles
with power door lock
system)
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
(vehicles with power
door lock system)
On Off
Vehicles with smart key
system: Operation after
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned
OFF
Vehicles without smart
key system: Operation
after the engine switch
is turned to the “LOCK”
position
On Off
Seat belt
reminder
(→P. 426)
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On Off
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
499
6
Vehicle specifications
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Maintenance data After the maintenance is performed. P. 360
Tire pressure warning
system (if equipped) When changing the tire size. P. 371
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
in cases such as after maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
500
6-3. Initialization
502
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
503
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte qu'elle couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
504
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité
(sièges arrière extérieurs)
Si la sangle diagonale gêne la personne au niveau du cou, utilisez le
guide confort de la ceinture de sécurité.
Sortez le guide confort de sa
poche.
Engagez la ceinture dans le
guide.
Le cordon élastique doit passer
sous la ceinture de sécurité.
Bouclez, positionnez et lâchez la
ceinture de sécurité.
1
ÉTAPE
2
ÉTAPE
3
ÉTAPE
505
7
For owners
Entretien et soin
■Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau
savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier
régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées,
ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
■Ceinture de sécurité extérieure arrière
ATTENTION
■Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
Si la ceinture de sécurité est sortie de son
guide, repassez-la dedans avant de
l'utiliser.
506
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag
instructions in English.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables frontaux
Sacs de sécurité gonflables conducteur et passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur
et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de
l'habitacle.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux et rideau
Sacs de sécurité gonflables latéraux
Participent à la protection du thorax des occupants des sièges
avant.
Sacs de sécurité gonflables rideau
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures.
507
7
For owners
Composition du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
Capteurs de sacs de
sécurité gonflables frontaux
Système de classification
de l'occupant du siège
passager avant (ECU et
capteurs)
Capteurs de sacs de
sécurité gonflables latéraux
et rideau
Sac de sécurité gonflable
passager avant
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
latéraux
Sacs de sécurité gonflables
rideau
Témoins indicateurs
“PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON” et “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF”
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
passager avant
Boîtier électronique de sacs
de sécurité gonflables
Capteurs de sacs de
sécurité gonflables rideau
Sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
conducteur
Capteur de la position du
siège conducteur
508
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SÉCURITÉ GONFLABLES
INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes
de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur
(FMVSS208). Le système de sacs de sécurité gonflables régule la
puissance de déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables
conducteur et passager avant. Le système de sac de sécurité
gonflable conducteur se compose d'un capteur de position de siège
conducteur, etc. Le système de sac de sécurité gonflable passager
avant se compose d'un capteur de classification des occupants du
siège passager avant, etc..
Les principaux éléments du système de sacs de sécurité gonflables
SRS sont illustrés ci-dessus. Le système des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS est commandé par un boîtier électronique. Ce boîtier
intègre un capteur de sécurité et un capteur de sac de sécurité
gonflable.
Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latéral l'exige, le système de
sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS déclenche les dispositifs
pyrotechniques de gonflage (générateurs de gaz). Le déploiement
rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une
réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un
gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
509
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables.
À défaut, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
●Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs de protection
complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
●Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS conducteur se déploie avec une
violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le
conducteur se trouve très près du sac de sécurité gonflable.
L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la
NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
Sachant que la zone à risque du sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur se
trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous
disposez d'une confortable marge de sécurité en vous plaçant à 10 in.
(250 mm) de votre sac de sécurité gonflable conducteur. Cette distance
est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant de direction et le sternum. Si vous
êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre
position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, tout en continuant à pouvoir
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé,
simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des
difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un
coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre
véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant de direction est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a
pour effet d'orienter le sac de sécurité gonflable en direction de votre
poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant de direction et la vue des
commandes du tableau de bord.
510
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Le sac de sécurité gonflable SRS passager avant se déploie également
avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire
mortelle si le passager avant se trouve très près du sac de sécurité
gonflable. Éloignez le siège passager avant au maximum du sac de
sécurité gonflable, et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à être assis bien
droit dans le siège.
●Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité à la boucle du
siège conducteur, mais pas à la
ceinture de sécurité proprement dite, le
système de sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS conducteur pense que vous avez
attaché votre ceinture de sécurité, alors
qu'en fait c'est faux. Dans ce cas, il se
peut que le sac de sécurité gonflable
conducteur ne se déploie pas
correctement en cas d'accident, et vous
risquez d'être tué ou grièvement
blessé. Veillez donc à porter la ceinture
de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture
de sécurité.
511
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un
sac de sécurité gonflable. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les
enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota
recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient
installés sur le siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés.
C'est à l'arrière que les nourrissons et les enfants sont les mieux protégés.
●N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le
siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” est allumé. En cas d'accident, par la violence et la vitesse de
son déploiement, le sac de sécurité gonflable passager avant peut blesser
grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si vous l'avez installé à la place du passager
avant dans un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route.
●Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
512
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant le sac de sécurité gonflable
SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir
sur les genoux du passager avant.
●Ne conduisez pas le véhicule avec
quelque chose sur les genoux, et
n'autorisez pas non plus le passager à
voyager avec quelque chose sur les
genoux.
●Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
●Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur le siège passager en appui contre
la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains
à l'extérieur du véhicule.
●Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord ou la garniture
centrale du volant de direction.
Au déploiement des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS conducteur et passager
avant, tout objet risque de se
transformer en projectile.
513
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS latéraux, car il risquerait
d'en gêner le déploiement.
●Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS (oP.
507).
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS.
●Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (déploiement) des sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, car ils
sont alors encore très chauds.
●Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit ou à la poignée de maintien.
●Ne suspendez aux crochets à
vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun
objet dur. En cas de déploiement du
sac de sécurité gonflable rideau SRS,
ces objets peuvent se transformer en
projectiles capables de vous blesser
grièvement, voire de vous tuer.
514
ATTENTION
■Précautions avec les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS
●Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement d'un sac de
sécurité gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de
l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de
danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles
irritations de la peau.
●Si les parties renfermant les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS, telles que la
garniture du moyeu de volant et les garnitures de montants avant et
arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par
votre concessionnaire Toyota.
■Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système de sacs de
sécurité gonflables SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications
suivantes.
Les sacs de sécurité gonflables SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner
correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
●Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des sacs de sécurité
gonflables SRS.
●Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou du rail latéral de toit.
●Réparations ou modifications de l'aile avant, du bouclier avant, ou du côté
de l'habitacle.
●Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.).
●Modifications des suspensions du véhicule.
●Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que radio émetteur/récepteur ou
lecteurs CD.
●Aménagements apportés au véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un
handicap physique.
517
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C .................................... 192, 198
ABS........................................... 166
Air conditioning filter.............. 384
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter............. 384
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 192
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 198
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.... 88
Airbag precautions for your
child...................................... 92
Airbag warning light.............. 425
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions............. 89
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................... 92
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............ 97
General airbag precautions.... 92
Locations of airbags ............... 85
Modification and disposal of
airbags ................................. 96
Proper driving posture...... 83, 92
Side airbag operating
conditions............................. 89
Side airbag precautions.......... 92
SRS airbags ........................... 85
Antenna.................................... 214
Anti-lock brake system........... 166
Ashtray..................................... 324
Audio input .............................. 253
Audio system
Antenna.................................214
Audio input ............................253
AUX port................................253
CD player/changer ................217
iPod .......................................233
MP3/WMA disc......................225
Optimal use ...........................248
Portable music player............253
Radio.....................................210
Steering wheel audio
switch..................................255
Type ......................................206
USB memory.........................240
Automatic air conditioning
system ....................................192
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .........137
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P......................450
S mode..................................140
AUX port ...................................253
Auxiliary boxes ........................318
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Wattage.................................479
Battery
Checking ...............................366
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ..............454
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................174
Bluetooth® audio .....................259
Bluetooth® phone ....................275
Bottle holder.............................320
Brake
Fluid ......................................363
Parking brake ........................145
Brake assist..............................166
Break-in tips .............................120
A
B
518
Alphabetical index
Care
Exterior..................................336
Interior ...................................338
Seat belts ..............................339
Cargo capacity .........................170
CD changer...............................217
CD player ..................................217
Chains .......................................174
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........102
Booster seats, installation .....106
Convertible seats,
definition .............................102
Convertible seats,
installation...........................106
Front passenger occupant
classification system .............97
Infant seats, definition ...........102
Infant seats, installation.........106
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors ...............................107
Installing CRS with
seat belts ............................109
Installing CRS with top
tether straps........................113
Child safety
Airbag precautions ..................92
Battery precautions .......367, 458
Child restraint system............102
Child-protectors.......................40
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................60
Installing child restraints........106
Moon roof precautions ............74
Power window lock switch.......69
Power window precautions .....70
Removed key battery
precautions .........................389
Seat belt comfort guide ...........57
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................63
Seat belt precautions ..............61
Seat heater precautions........327
Trunk precautions ................... 47
Child-protectors.........................40
Cleaning
Exterior.................................. 336
Interior...................................338
Seat belts .............................. 339
Clock ......................................... 323
Compass................................... 330
Condenser ................................ 363
Console box ............................. 314
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............460
Cruise control ..........................162
Cup holder................................316
Curtain shield airbags ...............85
Customizable features ............495
Daytime running light
system .................................... 158
Defogger
Rear window .........................205
Side mirror ............................205
Dimension ................................468
Dinghy towing ...................187,188
Display
Trip information ..................... 154
Do-it-yourself maintenance ....347
Doors
Door lock..................... 23, 34, 39
Door windows .........................69
Side mirrors.............................67
Driver's seat belt reminder
light.........................................426
Driving
Break-in tips ..........................120
Correct posture ....................... 83
Procedures............................118
Winter driving tips ................. 174
C
D
519
Alphabetical index
Electric power steering........... 166
Electronic key
If your electronic key
battery is discharged.......... 452
Emergency flashers
Switch................................... 414
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on ..... 424
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 452
If the engine will not start...... 448
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................... 450
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............. 454
If the warning buzzer
sounds ............................... 424
If you have a flat tire ............ 436
If you lose your keys............. 451
If you think something is
wrong ................................. 420
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 463
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency... 465
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ................................. 415
If your vehicle overheats ...... 460
Engine
Compartment........................ 356
Engine switch ............... 129, 133
Hood..................................... 351
How to start the
engine ........................ 129, 133
Identification number............ 468
If the engine will not start...... 448
Ignition switch............... 129, 133
Overheating.......................... 460
Engine coolant
Capacity ............................... 475
Checking .............................. 362
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 174
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ......................................147
Engine immobilizer system.......79
Engine oil
Capacity ................................473
Checking ...............................358
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................174
Engine oil maintenance
data .........................................360
Engine switch light ..................309
EPS............................................166
Event data recorder .................422
Floor mat...................................329
Fluid
Brake.....................................363
Washer..................................368
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................159
Wattage.................................479
Front passenger occupant
classification system ..............97
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light.........................426
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................49
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................157
Wattage.................................479
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................144
Wattage.................................479
E
F
520
Alphabetical index
Fuel
Capacity ................................472
Fuel gauge ............................147
Fuel pump shut off system....421
Gas station information .........528
Information ............................480
Refueling .................................75
Type ......................................472
Fuel door.....................................75
Fuel filler door ............................75
Fuel pump shut off system .....421
Fuses.........................................390
Gas station information...........528
Gauges......................................147
Glove box..................................314
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone) ................275
Hazard lights
Switch....................................414
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................54
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs.............400
Switch....................................157
Wattage.................................479
Heaters
Seat heater............................327
Side mirror.............................205
Hood..........................................351
Horn...........................................146
I/M test ......................................346
Identification number
Engine...................................468
Vehicle ..................................468
Ignition switch..................129, 133
Illuminated entry system.........310
Indicator lights .........................150
Initialization
Items to initialize ................... 499
Inside rear view mirror ..............65
Interior lights
Interior lights .........................309
Switch ...................................311
Wattage.................................479
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ..........353
Vehicle-equipped jack...........436
Jack handle ..............................436
Keyless entry .............................34
Keys
Electronic key.......................... 20
Engine switch................129, 133
If you lose your keys ............. 451
If your electronic key
battery is discharged ..........452
Ignition switch ............... 129, 133
Key number.............................20
Keyless entry ..........................34
Keys ........................................ 20
Mechanical key ....................... 20
Wireless remote control key....34
G
H
I
J
K
521
Alphabetical index
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 400
Switch................................... 157
Wattage ................................ 479
Light bulbs
Replacing ............................. 400
Wattage ................................ 479
Lights
Fog light switch..................... 159
Headlights switch ................. 157
Interior light switch................ 311
Personal light switch............. 311
Personal/interior light
switch ................................. 312
Replacing light bulbs ............ 400
Turn signal lever................... 144
Wattage ................................ 479
Load capacity .......................... 173
Lock steering column..... 131, 135
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance ...................... 347
General maintenance........... 343
Maintenance data................. 468
Maintenance requirements... 341
Manual air conditioning
system ................................... 198
Manual transmission
Manual transmission ............ 143
Meter
Instrument panel light
control ................................ 149
Meters .................................. 147
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror............ 65
Side mirror heater................. 205
Side mirrors ............................ 67
Vanity mirrors ....................... 322
Moon roof ...................................71
MP3 disc ...................................225
Multi-information
display ....................................154
Noise from under vehicle ..........15
Odometer ..................................147
Oil
Engine oil ..............................358
Opener
Fuel filler door .........................75
Hood......................................351
Trunk .......................................45
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............67
Outside temperature
display ....................................154
Overheating, Engine ................460
Parking brake ...........................145
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................157
Wattage.................................479
Personal lights
Switch....................................311
Wattage.................................479
Personal/interior lights
Switch....................................312
Wattage.................................479
Power outlet .............................326
Power windows ..........................69
L
M
N
O
P
522
Alphabetical index
Radiator ....................................363
Radio .........................................210
Rear seats
Folding down...........................52
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulb...............400
Switch....................................157
Wattage.................................479
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............400
Switch....................................144
Wattage.................................479
Rear view mirror
Compass ...............................330
Rear window defogger ............205
Replacing
Fuses ....................................390
Key battery ............................386
Light bulbs.............................400
Tires ......................................436
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners ........................502
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.............56
Automatic Locking
Retractor............................... 59
Child restraint system
installation...........................106
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts ...................... 339
Emergency Locking
Retractor............................... 59
How to wear your seat belt .....56
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................60
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use ................................. 59
Reminder light....................... 426
Seat belt extenders .................60
Seat belt pretensioners...........58
Seat heaters ............................. 327
Seating capacity ......................173
Seats
Adjustment .............................. 49
Adjustment precautions ..........51
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ..............106
Cleaning................................338
Head restraint .........................54
Properly sitting in the seat.......83
Rear seat folding down ...........52
Seat heaters..........................327
Service reminder
indicators ..............................150
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.........137
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ................ 450
Manual transmission ............. 143
Shift lock system .....................450
Side airbags ...............................85
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 400
Switch ...................................157
Wattage.................................479
R
S
523
Alphabetical index
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding .............. 67
Smart key system
Entry function ......................... 23
Starting the engine ............... 129
Spare tire
Inflation pressure.................. 378
Storage location ................... 436
Spark plug................................ 475
Specifications.......................... 468
Speech command switch ....... 280
Speedometer ........................... 147
Steering
Column lock release..... 131, 135
Steering wheel
Adjustment ............................. 64
Audio switches ..................... 255
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 400
Wattage ................................ 479
Storage feature........................ 313
Storage precautions ............... 170
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 463
Sun visors................................ 321
Sunshade
Roof........................................ 72
Switch
Emergency flasher switch .... 414
Engine switch ............... 129, 133
Fog light switch..................... 159
Hazard light switch ............... 414
Ignition switch............... 129, 133
Light switches....................... 157
Power door lock switch........... 39
Power window switch ............. 69
Window lock switch ................ 69
Wiper and washer switch ..... 160
Tachometer...............................147
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................157
Wattage.................................479
Talk switch................................280
Telephone switch.....................280
Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system .....79
Theft prevention labels..............82
Tire inflation pressure .............378
Tire information
Glossary ................................489
Size .......................................486
Tire identification number......485
Uniform tire quality
grading................................487
Tires
Chains ...................................174
Checking ...............................370
If you have a flat tire..............436
Inflation pressure...................378
Inflation pressure sensor.......371
Information ............................483
Replacing ..............................436
Rotating tires .........................370
Size .......................................478
Snow tires .............................174
Spare tire...............................436
Tools .........................................436
Total load capacity...................173
Towing
Dinghy towing................187, 188
Emergency towing.................416
Trailer towing.................178, 186
TRAC .........................................166
Traction control........................166
Trip information .......................154
Trip meter .................................147
Trunk
Opener ....................................45
T
524
Alphabetical index
Trunk light
Wattage.................................479
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............400
Switch....................................144
Wattage.................................479
Valet key .....................................20
Vanity mirrors...........................322
Vehicle identification
number ...................................468
Vehicle stability control...........166
VSC............................................166
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................424
Downshifting..........................141
Seat belt reminder.................426
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system ..........425
Brake assist system ..............425
Brake system ........................424
Charging system ...................424
Electric power steering
system ................................425
Engine oil maintenance.........426
Engine oil pressure ...............424
Low fuel level ........................426
Low tire pressure warning
light .....................................426
Malfunction indicator lamp ....425
Open door .............................426
Pretensioners ........................425
Seat belt reminder light .........426
Smart key system..................434
SRS airbags ..........................425
Tire pressure warning light....426
Washer fluid ..........................426
Washer
Checking ............................... 368
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 174
Switch ...................................160
Washing and waxing ...............336
Weight
Cargo capacity ...................... 170
Load limits.............................173
Weight...................................468
Wheels ......................................382
Window glasses ........................69
Window lock switch...................69
Windows
Power windows .......................69
Rear window defogger..........205
Washer.................................. 160
Windshield wipers ...................160
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery............386
Wireless remote control .......... 34
WMA disc..................................225
V
W
525
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 436 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 7 9 Engine immobilizer system
P. 448 If the engine will not start
P. 452 If the electronic key does not oper-
ate properly
P. 454 If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 450
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 460 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 451 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 454 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 3 9 Doors
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 463 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light
comes on
P. 424 If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
526
What to do if...
Type A
Type B
527
What to do if...
■Warning lights
P. 426
or
P. 4 2 4 P. 426
P. 4 2 4 P. 425
P. 4 2 4 P. 425
P. 425
or
P. 4 2 5 P. 426
P. 4 2 5 P. 426
P. 426
or
P. 4 2 5 P. 426
P. 4 2 6 P. 434
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Brake system warning
light
Tire pressure warning
light
Low windshield washer fluid level
warning light
Charging system warn-
ing light
Electric power steering
warning light
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Slip indicator
light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Cruise control indicator
light*
Open door warning light
SRS warning light
Low fuel level warning
light
ABS warning light
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Maintenance required
reminder light
Smart key system warn-
ing light
528
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Hood lock release lever
P. 3 5 1
Fuel filler door opener
P. 7 5
Tire inflation pressure
P. 478
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 351
Trunk opener
P. 4 5
Fuel filler door
P. 7 5
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 76, 472
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 478
Engine oil
capacity
(Drain and
refill ⎯
reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder
(2ZR-FE)
engine
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
With filter 4.4 (4.2, 3.7)
Without filter 4.1 (3.9, 3.4)
2.4 L 4-cylinder
(2AZ-FE)
engine
With filter 4.0 (3.8, 3.3)
Without filter 3.8 (3.6, 3.2)
Engine oil type P. 473

Navigation menu